SBO20 Servicing and Procedure

Technical Documentation
Servicing Procedure Catalog
SBO 20/24 - N° 12410
HSK
Thaïlande
L
E
D
I
Publication date : 13/11/2009
S
©
SIDEL "BLOWING & COATING DIVISION" - Avenue de la patrouille de France - Octeville sur mer - BP 204 - 76 053 Le Havre Cedex FRANCE
Tel : 00 33 (0)2.32.85.86.87 - Fax : 00.33 (0)2.32.85.81.00 - Email : service@fra.sidel.com
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision histor
history
y
REVISION HISTORY
The information contained within this document is the property of SIDEL. Except in the case of authorizations
expressly accorded
acc orded granted by means of a contract, no part of this document may be copied or disclosed without
the prior written agreement of SIDEL
m Creation and revision
Date
Creation 13/11/2009
L
E
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 1/ 2

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision history
L
E
ID
S
©
2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
Servicing Pr
Procedure
ocedure Catalog / Contents
GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

USER PROCEDURE Part B
MECHANICAL OPERATION
Part C
PROCEDURE
ELECTRICAL OPERATION
Part D
PROCEDURE
CONTENTS
General presentation ............................................................................................................................................. 1

Safety procedure .............................................................................................................................................. BSU
Operating procedure ........................................................................................................................................ BCU
Production process procedure .....................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.................................... BPU
MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part C

Inspecting / cleaning procedure ....................................................................................................................... BNM
Removal / Refit procedure ............................................................................................................................... BDM
Adjustment procedure ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................................................
.. BRM
Greasing procedure ..........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
............... BGM
ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part D

Inspecting / cleaning procedure ....................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................
................................... BNE
Removal / Refit procedure .........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................
..... BDE
Adjustment procedure ...................................................................................................................................... BRE
L
E
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 1/ 2

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog / Contents
L
E
ID
S
©
2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL PRESENTATION 1
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.1
General Information ............................................................................................................................................ 1.2
Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog .............................................................................................................. 1.3
Procedure classification ............................................................................................................................. 1.3.1
Information contained in the procedure bars ...............................................
.............................................................................................
.............................................. 1.3.2
List of procedure bars ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................ .................... 1.3.3
Contents of the procedure files .................................................................................................................. 1.3.4
Using the procedures ................................................................................................................................. 1.3.5

Initial status of the machine ............................................................................................................... 1.3.5.1
Basic precautions .............................................................................................................................. 1.3.5.2
Final status of the machine ...............................................................................................................
................................................................. .............................................. 1.3.5.3
Writing conventions ....................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................ 1.3.6
Documents supplied with the machine ............................................................................................................... 1.4
L
E
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1/ 2

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part A
L
E
ID
S
©
A - 2/2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation
1 GENERAL PRESENTATION
1.1 Foreword
Before using a procedure, first read the User Manual.
1.2 General Information

The Servicing Procedure Catalog includes the following:
-
safety measures and precautions,
- operating modes for preventive maintenance operations at levels 1, 2 and 3,
- main actions relating to the operation or the setting up of the machine.
1.3 Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog

1.3.1 Procedure classification
The procedures are classed in 5 categories:
- Safety procedure,
- operating procedure,
- process (machine setting) procedure,
- mechanical operation procedure,
- electrical operation procedure.
1.3.2 Information contained in the procedure bars
1 2 3 4 5
1-PIC071-01-xx.svg
m Operation pictogram (1)

The pictogram specifies the procedure type and is a visual reference which makes the Catalog easier to follow.
Pictogram Signifies
Safety procedure
Operating procedure
Production process procedure
Inspecting / cleaning procedure
Removal / Refit procedure
Adjustment procedure
Greasing procedure
L m Procedure level(2)
E
D
I
S
For operating and setting procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the required user profile.
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1 - 1/ 4

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation Part A
For safety and servicing procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the qualifications required of the
techncians.
m Procedure title (3)
Summary of the procedure.
m Procedure reference (4)
Procedure references are coded as follows:
- The first letter indicates the division within "SIDEL" to which the procedure belongs; "Blowing", "Coating",
"Filling" ...
-
The second letter indicates the type of procedure; Operating, Process, Cleaning, Removal, Adjustment or
Greasing.
- The third letter indicates the area of the procedure; Operation, Mechanical or Electrical.
- The 3 figures indicate the reference number of the procedure.
m Reference and number of pages (5)
The first figure indicates the page number. The second figure indicates the number of pages in the procedure file.
1.3.3 List of procedure bars
1-PIC070-01-02.svg
1.3.4 Contents of the procedure files

The procedures contain the following information:
- the part of the machine at which the procedure will take place,
- specific safety precautions relating to the procedure,
procedure,
- specific conditions relating to the procedure (machine status),
- equipment and materials required for the procedure (spare parts, specific tools, lubricants etc.),
-
procedures to be followed,
- actions at the end of the operation. L
E
ID
S
©
A - 1 - 2/4 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation
1.3.5 Using the procedures

1.3.5.1 Initial status of the machine
All servicing procedures
procedures (except operating
operating procedures)
procedures) assume that the machine has been correctly installed, stopped
normally (no faults) and has been connected to all required utilities (high and low pressure air, water, electricity etc.).
If this is not the case, you should first ensure that the machine meets these requirements.
All power supplies to the machine
machine (except those required
required by and specified in the servicing procedure
procedure)) must be shut
off.
1.3.5.2 Basic precautions
Before using any of the procedure sheets, first refer to the User manual for the following:
- to follow the safety precautions,
- to ensure that all personnel involved possess the required profile and qualifications,
- to ensure that the correct lubricants and/or cleaning agents are used.
Before starting, make you that you have read the entire procedure, in order to:
- identify the part of the machine at which the procedure needs to be carried out,
- ensure that all power and utility supplies not required for the procedure have been cut,
- follow all safety precautions
precautions specific to the procedure,
- obtain other procedure files as required,
- identify and obtain equipment required for the procedure.
Always follow each
each step of the procedure
procedure in order.
Unless otherwise indicated, tighten all threaded parts to the torques corresponding to their diameter and
type, please refer to chapter "Bolt tightening torques" chapter located in the "Appendix" section of the User
manual.
1.3.5.3 Final status of the machine
When you have completed a procedure, always check the following:
- that the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean,
- that no tools or foreign objects have been left behind,
- that the machine has been returned to production set up,
- that the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings.
1.3.6 Writing conventions
m Symbols
Important sections of text will be accompanie
accompanied
d by the following symbols:
Strictly prohibited.
prohibited.
Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.
Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.
Remark or observation on the results of an operation.
Additional information
information located
located in a sub-chapter
sub-chapter or another chapter in this
this manual o
orr another manual.
L
E
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1 - 3/ 4

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation Part A
m Symbols and writing conventions
Symbol or convention Signifies
Step number in the procedure file
Indicates a condition that must be met in order to carry out an action (Test - Check -
Indirect action)
The location of the operation
Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part
Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part in an

illustration
Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part
Indicates the result of a step in the procedure
Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier
Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual's

glossary
Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter
1.4 Documents supplied with the machine

- Presentation Manual.
- Operator Manual.
- Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog (inspection / cleaning, removal / refit, setting, lubrication,
lubrication, etc.).
- Spare-parts catalog "Machine" (assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Spare-parts catalog specific to articles to be produced, otherwise known as "Personalized" or "Custom"
parts(assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Back-up copy of the PCC (DVD-ROM) application.
L
E
ID
S
©
A - 1 - 4/4 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PROCEDURE BSU
Safety: opening/closing molds ...........................................................................
..................................................................................................................
....................................... BSU-001
Safety: blocking the manual rotation system ......................................
.................................................................................
......................................................
........... BSU-002
Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine ........................................................................... BSU-003
Pneumatic circuit safety checks ................................................................................................................ BSU-004
Checking the emergency stop buttons ...................................................................................................... BSU-005
Checking the door safeties in JOG mode ..........................................................
.................................................................................................
....................................... BSU-006
OPERATING PROCEDURE BCU

Turning on the power supplies to the machine ......................................................................................... BCU-001
Turning on the main machine power circuit .............................................................................................. BCU-002
Turning on the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-003
Turning on the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-004
Turning on the machine utilities ................................................................................................................ BCU-005
Running the machine in "Automatic" mode ........................................
.................................................................................
......................................................
............. BCU-006
Turning off the utility supplies to the machine ........................................................................................... BCU-008
Turning off the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-009
Turning off the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-010
Turning off the main machine circuit ......................................................................................................... BCU-011
Isolating the machine ................................................................................................................................ BCU-012
Using the JOG system .............................................................................................................................. BCU-013
Using manual rotation ............................................................................................................................... BCU-014
Running the machine in "Manual" mode ................................................................................................... BCU-015
Inspecting the preforms on delivery .......................................................................................................... BCU-016
Clearing preforms from the feeder ............................................................................................................ BCU-017
Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system ................................................................................ BCU-018
Operating the feeder in Automatic mode .................................................................................................. BCU-019
Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped ...................................
........................................................................
................................................
........... BCU-020
User management .............................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................... BCU-021
Alarm configuration ................................................................................................................................... BCU-022
Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms ....................................................................................... BCU-023
User login / logout ..................................................................................................................................... BCU-024
Entering numerical values ......................................................................................................................
.......................................................... ..............................................................
.. BCU-025
Acknowledging "critical" alarms ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................... . BCU-026
Configuring access to application functions .............................................................................................. BCU-027
Entering the date .......................................................................

......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... BCU-028
Operating the preform feeder in manual mode ......................................................................................... BCU-034
L
E Vision system, access to the blower ......................................................................................................... BCU-036
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 B - 1/ 2

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part B
PRODUCTION PROCESS PROCEDURE BPU
Setting points "P0" and "P10" ...............................................................
...................................................................................................................
.................................................... BPU-001
Setting the blowing pressure ..................................................................................................................... BPU-002
Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder .........................................................
........................................................................................
............................... BPU-003
Output rate setpoint ..................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
................................................................ BPU-004
Recipe management ................................................................................................................................. BPU-005
Solenoid valve test .................................................................................................................................... BPU-006
Oven test ...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... BPU-007
Preform feeder test ......................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................
............................................. BPU-008
Setting the parameters of the process ...................................................................................................... BPU-009
Carrying out
out a trial on a new production process ...................................................................................... BPU-010
Mechanical settings for the lamps ............................................................................................................. BPU-011
Setting the preblowing pressure ...........................................................................................................
.................................................... ...........................................................
.... BPU-012
Checking the preblow flow setting ........................................................................................................
.................................................... ........................................................
.... BPU-013
Checking the feeder preform count ........................................................................................................... BPU-014
Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors ...................................................................... BPU-015
Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints ........................................
...............................................................................
...............................................
........ BPU-017
Initializing the preform feeder production start .......................................................................................... BPU-027
L
E
ID
S
©
B - 2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24
User procedure
Safety procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety: opening/closing molds ...........................................................................
..................................................................................................................
....................................... BSU-001
Safety: blocking the manual rotation system ......................................
.................................................................................
......................................................
........... BSU-002
Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine ........................................................................... BSU-003
Pneumatic circuit safety checks ................................................................................................................ BSU-004
Checking the emergency stop buttons ...................................................................................................... BSU-005
Checking the door safeties in JOG mode ..........................................................
.................................................................................................
....................................... BSU-006
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure
1/2 BSU-001 Safety: opening/closing molds 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The holding brace (1) prevents the locking system from

dropping down from the up-position, which could result
in an operator losing his fingers.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Never attempt any work on an open mold support unit 1

without first positioning the holding brace (1).
Working on hot molds :
The following procedure is carried out on cold
co ld molds. Some
procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot
mold. In these cases always follow the following safetysafety
instructions:
Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face
during any work on the mold support unit.
1-008494-01-xx.svg
Protective equipment must be in accordance with the
stipulated risks.
Hot metal, risk of burns.
There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature

and pressure.
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
Machine isolated except for:
- primary electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004
"BCU-004,,
- PCC application set to "Settings",
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- locking system holding brace (1).
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure Part B
afety: opening/closing molds SU-001 2/2
PROCEDURE
Opening the mold support unit

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the
machine.
2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3- Place both hands below the nut (2) and move the locking
system upwards.
4- Manually, open the locking system fully.
1-006680-01-xx.svg
Positioning the holding brace
1 4
5- Place the holding brace (1) on the right mold support unit
support block (3), facing the lock.
6- Turn the knob (4).
The holding brace is now locked in position.
The mold support unit is now secured and there is no
risk of injury.
Removing the holding brace 3
7- Turn the knob (4).
The holding brace is now unlocked. 1-008495-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the locking system holding brace (1).

Closing the mold support unit
9- Place your hands on each of the support blocks (3 ; 5)
and close the mold support unit.
The mold support unit will lock automatically.
5 3
BEFORE YOU FINISH
10- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.
1-006683-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BSU-002 Safety: blocking the manual rotation system 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Blocking the manual rotation system prevents the

locking system from being opened manually by
pressing the button (1). Blocking the manual rotation
system ensures the safety of personnel when carrying
out maintenance as long as at least one machine door
is open.
For all major maintenance operations, use the locking

pin to prevent machine rotation, see
procedure "BSU-003.
"BSU-003.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
The visual may be different depending on the machine
model ad configuration.
MACHINE STATUS
1
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005 1-006908-05-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Inhibiting manual rotation

1- Press the (2) key.
The (A) window appears.
Manual rotation is now blocked.
machine.
Releasing manual
manual rotation 2
The manual rotation system can be released if all of the

machine doors are closed.
1-010353-02-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
afety: blocking the manual rotation system SU-002 2/2

5- Press the (3) key. A
Manual rotation is no longer inhibited.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 3
6- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

1-010348-02-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BSU-003 Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The machine is blocked at the blow wheel, however

safety cannot be guaranteed if parts of the transmission
have been removed.
When the locking brace (1) is inserted into the blow

wheel drive ring (2):
- the blow wheel is mechanically locked in position
and manual rotation cannot be used,
- the presence of the locking brace (1) is detected by
the sensor "B12.6" which sends a signal to the PLC 1-006030-65-xx.svg
preventing the machine from starting.
MACHINE STATUS
- all machine power and utilities turned off, see
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- 1 padlock.
PROCEDURE
Blocking
machine.
If necessary, use the manual rotation to position the 1
blow wheel drive ring (2), see procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
2- Fit the brace (1) on the drive ring (2).

3- Lock off the brace (1).
The machine can no longer rotate. 2
Unblocking
4- Release the brace (1).
5- Remove the
the brace (1).
The machine is now free to rotate.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006095-03-xx.svg
6- Stow the brace (1) back in its housing .

L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
afety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine SU-003 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BSU-004 Pneumatic circuit safety checks 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The aim of this procedure is to make sure that the

pressure in the air lines (except the low pressure and
the permanent pressure circuits) is released when a
door is opened or when an emergency stop button is
pressed while the machine is in production.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- PCC application set to "Settings".
1-006030-04-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
1- Test the blowing on the station located at the rear of the

"BPU-006..
blow wheel, see procedure "BPU-006
machine.
High pressure air circuit
F Check the pressure before regulati
regulation
on at the gauge (1).
The pressure gauge (1) indicates the pressure in the local
supply.
F Control the pressure value after adjusting the pressure
gauges (2).
The pressure gauges (2) indicate zero pressure?
The high pressure circuit is now secured. 2
· Go to the next step.
One of the pressure gauges (2) shows a pressure that
is not zero?
The high pressure circuit is not secured.
· Contact SIDEL.
1-007859-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
neumatic circuit safety checks SU-004 2/2
F Check the pressure at the gaug e (3).

the pressure gauge (3) indicates zero pressure?
The preblow circuit is now secured.
The pressure gauge (3) indicates remaining
pressure?
The preblow circuit is not secured.
·
Contact SIDEL.
1-007331-02-xx.svg
Low pressure air circuit
F Check the pressure before regulati
regulation
on at the gauge (4).
The pressure gauge (4) indicates the pressure in the local
supply.
F Check the pressure at the gaug e (5).
the pressure gauge (5) indicates zero pressure?
The low pressure circuit is now secured.
The pressure gauge (5) indicates remaining 4 5
pressure?
The low pressure circuit is not secured. 1-006273-06-xx.svg
· Contact SIDEL.
F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band
(A) at the PCC. A
If any of the pneumatic circuits are at abnormal

pressures
pressures contact SIDEL.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
1-006403-04-02.svg E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BSU-005 Checking the emergency stop buttons 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The emergency stop buttons stop the machine

immediately when pressed by the operator.
For more information on the locations of the emergency

stop buttons, please refer to chapter "System
safety" chapter in the User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
- PCC application in "Manual" mode, see
1-006030-00-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
PROCEDURE
Blowing machine emergency stop button inspection

1- Select the minimum output rate instruction, see
1 6
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
The alarm will sound until the button (1) changes status.
3- Release the button (1).
The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 1-006704-11-xx.svg
4- Press one of the emergency stop buttons .
The machine stops immediately.
An siren sounds
sounds and an alarm light
light appears.
A critical message
message appear
appears at the PCC.
5- Release the emergency stop button
button .
6- Acknowledg
Acknowledge
e the fault, see procedure "BCU-026
"BCU-026..
7- Repeat steps 2 to 6 until you have checked all of the
emergency stop buttons.
If any of the emergency stops do not work, contact
SIDEL.
Inspecting the emergency stop buttons on the preform
distributor
The "Feeder" family appears.
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
hecking the emergency stop buttons SU-005 2/2

The numerical keypad appears. 2 4 5
10- Enter the minimum setpoint value.
The numerical keypad appears.
12- Enter the minimum setpoint value.
13- Press the (6)distributor

The preform key. starts.
14- Press one of the emergency stop buttons .
The machine stops immediately.
An alarm message
message appears
appears at the PCC.
PCC.
15- Release the emergency stop button .
16- Acknowledge the fault, see procedure "BCU-026.
"BCU-026.
17- Repeat steps 13 to 16 until you have checked all of the
emergency stop buttons.
If any of the emergency stops do not work, contact
SIDEL.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-008464-04-02.svg
18- Make sure that all of the emergency stops are unlocked.
19- Enter the production output rate, see
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BSU-006 Checking the door safeties in JOG mode 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
In JOG mode, the acknowledgement of a fault due to a

door opening will clear when the door is closed.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
PROCEDURE
1- Connect the JOG (1) to one of the zones "Z1" to "Z7", see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Open a machine door not corresponding to that zone. 1-006265-01-xx.svg
3- Press button (1).

The machine should not start.
4- Press the (2)
(2) key.
The alarm message window (A) appears.
5- Make sure that the alarm message (A) corresponds to the
1
number of the door opened.
6- Close the door.
The message is cleared from the window (A).
7- Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check all of the doors.
8- Press the (3)
(3) key.
The window (A) disappears from the screen.
9- Connect the JOG (1) to another zone.
1-006268-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
hecking the door safeties in JOG mode SU-006 2/2
10- Repeat steps 2 to 7, to check all of the zones from "Z1"

to "Z7". 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
11- Stop JOG mode, see procedure "BCU-013.

"BCU-013.
1-010353-29-02.svg
A 3
1-010017-05-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
User procedure
Operating procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Turning on the power supplies to the machine ......................................................................................... BCU-001
Turning on the main machine power circuit .............................................................................................. BCU-002
Turning on the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-003
Turning on the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-004
Turning on the machine utilities ................................................................................................................ BCU-005
Running the machine in "Automatic" mode ........................................
.................................................................................
......................................................
............. BCU-006
Turning off the utility supplies to the machine ........................................................................................... BCU-008
Turning off the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-009
Turning off the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-010
Turning off the main machine circuit ......................................................................................................... BCU-011
Isolating the machine ................................................................................................................................ BCU-012
Using the JOG system .............................................................................................................................. BCU-013
Using manual rotation ............................................................................................................................... BCU-014
Running the machine in "Manual" mode ................................................................................................... BCU-015
Inspecting the preforms on delivery .......................................................................................................... BCU-016
Clearing preforms from the feeder ............................................................................................................ BCU-017
Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system ................................................................................ BCU-018
Operating the feeder in Automatic mode .................................................................................................. BCU-019
Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped ...................................
........................................................................
................................................
........... BCU-020
User management .............................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................... BCU-021
Alarm configuration ................................................................................................................................... BCU-022
Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms ....................................................................................... BCU-023
User login / logout ..................................................................................................................................... BCU-024
Entering numerical values ......................................................................................................................
.......................................................... ..............................................................
.. BCU-025
Acknowledging "critical" alarms ................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................... . BCU-026
Configuring access to application functions .............................................................................................. BCU-027
Entering the date .......................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... BCU-028
Operating the preform feeder in manual mode ......................................................................................... BCU-034
Vision system, access to the blower ......................................................................................................... BCU-036
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure
1/2 BCU-001 Turning on the power supplies to the machine 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the

utility systems before turning on the power, air and
water supplies.
Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and

authorized personnel only.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
Circuit breaker
Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling
Q1A
protection
Q1B Protection for the on-board component 1
Q1C 24 Vcc 40 A supply protection

Q1D 24 Vcc 20 A supply protection
Q1E 24 Vcc poles protection
Q1F 24 V input/ouput protection
Q1G 230 V transformer up-circuit protection
Q1H 230 V transformer down-circuit protection
Q1AD 24 V connection protection
Q109A Lighting protection
Q13AA Cabinet cooling system protection
PROCEDURE 2

2- Turn on the air and water supplies, see
procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
3- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet . 1-008533-02-xx.svg
4- Open the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit.

5- Close circuit breaker "Q1A" (2).
2
The primary electrical circuit is now live.
6- Close the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit.
The plc, the UPS and the cabinet cooling system are now
under power.
7- Set the power module (4) standby switch (3) to position
"I".
When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (5) on the
corresponding power module will light up, indicating a
battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty,
1-008521-02-xx.svg
SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the
"BDE-001..
batteries, see procedure "BDE-001
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure Part B
urning on the power supplies to the machine CU-001 2/2
8- Set the main switch (6) to "RUN".

9- Turn on the main machine circuit, see
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002.
10- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004.
"BCU-004.
11- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003
"BCU-003..
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check that the pneumatic circuits are secured, se e
procedure BSU-004.
BSU-004 .
1-008633-01-xx.svg
1-007067-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-002 Turning on the main machine power circuit 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Certain parts of the machine, such as the plc, the UPS

and the cabinet cooling system, are not powered by the
main machine circuit but by the primary electrical
"BCU-001..
circuit, see procedure "BCU-001
1-006030-13-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

2- Close the door to the electrical cabinet. 1
3- Close the main section switch "Q1" (1) on the control

panel. 5
The power-on light (2) comes on.
4- Release the emergency stop button (3).
5- Turn the key on the general switch (4) to "I".
6- Press the start button (5). 2
The button (5) lights up.
The machine and the preform feeder are now under 3
power.
1-006263-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning on the main machine power circuit CU-002 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-003 Turning on the preform feeder 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the

utility systems before turning on the power, air and
water supplies.

Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the

peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located in
6 3
the main electrical cabinet . When the main machine
circuit is turned on at the main circuit breaker "Q1"
1-006030-125-xx.svg
power is also supplied to the preform feeder, see
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002.
If "Q1"
"Q1" (main electrical cabinet) is closed
closed and 6 4 5
"Q1KA"(4) is open, the terminal "X1" and the orange
wiring in the preform distributer cabinets is live.
This procedure applies during maintenance after a

manual shut off of the unscramler rollers and the
elevator column/hopper assembly, see
procedure "BCU-010
"BCU-010..
PROCEDURE
1-008520-03-xx.svg
The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B)
electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model.
2- Close the doors to the electrical cabinet
cabi net (3) for the hopper
A 3 2 1
*2.
The "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper electrical
cainet (3) is powered from the "Q1KA" circuit breaker
(4) in the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet
(6).
3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker
breaker (1) in the hopper
electrical cabinet (3) to position "I".
1-008518-04-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning on the preform feeder CU-003 2/2
4- Close the doors to the unscrambler roller assembly

electrical cabinet (6). B 3 1 2 7
5- Position the "Q1KA" circuit

circu it breaker (4) in the unscrambler
roller electrical cabinet (6) to position "I".
The power-on lamps (2 ; 5) light up.
The remote modules in the plc and the cooling system for
the cabinets are under power.
6- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper start
button (7).
The button (7) lights up.
The hopper and elevator column assembly is ready for
operation.
If there is an intermediate conveyor (optional), it is 1-008516-03-xx.svg
started by pressing the button (7).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
7- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-004 Turning on the PCC 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001 .
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002.
PROCEDURE
1- Open the door (1) on the control station.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
2- Turn the switch (2) on the PCC to "ON".

1
3- Close the door (1) on the control station.
1-006476-01-xx.svg
L 1-006278-05-xx.svg
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning on the PCC CU-004 2/2

The UPS (4) is now under power.
The PCC and "WINDOWS" start up.
The PCC application starts.
4
1-006333-01-xx.svg
F Wait a few seconds.
The "Welcome" family page appears. A
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010388-01-02.svg
1-006403-11-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-005 Turning on the machine utilities 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For further information on the fluid circuits and their

corresponding valves, see the User Manual.
Depending on the machine configuration, the external

hydraulic module can be integrated in the
thermoregulator or independent. For more information
on how the thermoregulator works, consult the
technical documentation delivered with this
equipment..
The number of external hydraulc modules varies

1-006030-118-xx.svg
according to the production set-up.
Thermoregulators installed upstream from the machine

provide thermal conditioning of the fluids that circulate
in the blow wheel..
For more information on how the thermoregulator

works, consult the technical documentation delivered
with this equipment..
equipment..
Never attempt to operate the machine without water in 1 2

the hydraulic circuits.
PROCEDURE
External hydraulic module

1- Open the doors of the external hydraulic module..
During production, only one valve (1) must be open.
2- Open the valves (1 ; 2).

3- Start the related thermoregulator(s)..
Hydraulic interface panel
machine.
1-007969-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning on the machine utilities CU-005 2/4
F Make sure that the valves (3 ; 4 ) are closed.

If the drain valves (3) are open.
· "BDM-043..
Fill the hydraulic lines, see procedure "BDM-043
If the drain valves (4) are open.
· "BDM-075..
Fill the hydraulic lines, see procedure "BDM-075
5- Open the valves (5).
5 6
1-007351-10-xx.svg
8- Open the valve (7).
1-007485-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-005 Turning on the machine utilities 2

machine.
11- Unpadlock the valve (9).
12- Gently open the valve (9).
The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes. 11
F
Check the pressure before regulat
regulation
ion at the gauge (10).
F Check the pressure after regulat
regulation
If the pressure is not correct.
· Set the blowing pressure to , see
procedure "BPU-002.
"BPU-002.
9
Any intervention on the high pressure circuit is no longer
secured. 10
1-007859-09-xx.svg

14
machine.
Open the high pressure air supply.
14- Unpadlock the valve

valve (14).
The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes.
15 16
F Check the pressure before regulat
regulation
F Check the pressure after regulat
regulation
1-006273-09-xx.svg
If the pressure is not correct.
· Adjust the service pressure,
pressure, see
procedure "BCU-018.
"BCU-018.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
16- Close the external hydraulic module doors.

L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning on the machine utilities CU-005 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-006 Running the machine in Automatic mode 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
During a production cycle, do not press the key (3)

(except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will
stop automatically with the preforms still in the oven and
articles being blown. Clearing these items will be
difficult and will complicate the restart of production.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
- the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into the
machine, see procedure "BPU-005.
"BPU-005. 1-006030-14-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
F Check that all of the options physically present on the
machine have been activat
activated
ed in the PCC applicati
application
on as 1
per your machine
mac hine configuration.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Option

selection", in the User manual.

F Check that there are no faults.
F Check the output rate value (1), se e
procedure BPU-004.
BPU-004 .
2- Select "Automatic" mode for the blowing machine, using
the key (2).
"Automatic" mode is reserved for starting machine
production.
For further information, please refer to chapter

""Automatic" mode", in the User manual.
3- Select "Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see
3 2
procedure "BCU-019.
"BCU-019.
Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are 1-006403-01-02.svg
independent from the Manual and Automatic modes on

the blowing machine.
If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the preform

feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see
procedure "BCU-034.
"BCU-034.
4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.
The brake opens and the machine begins to turn.
When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms
3 5 4
will begin to feed into the machine.
Bottle production begins.
1-006706-03-xx.svg
During production, the (4) key allows preform feeding
to be suspended without stopping the machine.
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
unning the machine in Automatic mode CU-006 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
The machine is in production cycle.
7- Press the key (5) to stop production.

The machine will clear all preforms and bottles.
The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will
continue for another 2 minutes.
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-008 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For further information on the fluid circuits and their

corresponding valves, see the User Manual.

equipment..

1-006030-118-xx.svg
Thermoregulators installed upstream from the machine

provide thermal conditioning of the fluids that circulate
in the blow wheel..

equipment..
Never attempt to operate the machine without water in 1 2

Intervention on hot hydraulic circuits :
Please read carefully all the safety instructions before

carrying out any works on the hot hydraulic systems.
Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face.
MACHINE STATUS
- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006
"BCU-006..
PROCEDURE
External hydraulic module

1- Stop the thermoregulator(s).
1-007969-01-xx.svg
3- Close the inlet valves (1).
4- Close the return valve (2).
Hydraulic interface panel
machine.
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning off the utility supplies to the machine CU-008 2/4

machine.
8- Close the inlet valves (3).
9- Close the outlet valves (4).
10- Close the inlet valve (5). 3 4
11- Close the return valve (6).
5 6
1-007351-11-xx.svg
machine.
13- Close the valve (7).
The high pressure air system is now isolated.
The high pressure air system has now been purged. 9
F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges
(8).
(9).
14- Lock out the valve (7).
7
1-007859-10-xx.svg

10
machine.
16- Close the valve (10).
The low pressure air system is now isolated.
The low pressure air system has now been purged.
(11).
(12). 11 12
17- Lock out the valve (10). 1-006273-10-xx.svg

L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-008 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning off the utility supplies to the machine CU-008 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-009 Turning off the PCC 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Exit the PCC application before turning

turning off the PCC in
order to avoid any malfunctions on the PCC
application.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001.
"BCU-001.
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002. 1-006030-14-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

1
The PCC application shuts down.
1-006403-09-02.svg
3- Shut down the PCC from the "Windows" start menu.

A
F Wait for the PCC to shut down.
1-006102-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning off the PCC CU-009 2/4

5- Turn off the UPS (4) by pressing the button (5).
To reach the switch (6) for the PCC open the door (7)
to the control panel.
6- If required turn the PCC switch (6) to "OFF".
1-006278-03-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The procedure is now complete. 4
1-006333-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-009 Turning off the PCC 2
1-006476-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©

SBO 20/24
urning off the PCC CU-009 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©

SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-010 Turning off the preform feeder 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

authorized personnel only. 2
Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the

peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located in
the main electrical cabinet . Isolating the main machine
power circuit at the main "Q1" circuit breaker cuts the
power supply to the prefrom feeder, see
procedure "BCU-011.
"BCU-011. 10 5
If "Q1KA" (4) is open and "Q1" (main electrical cabinet)

1-006030-124-xx.svg
is closed, the "X1" terminal *6 and the orange wiring in
the preform distributer electrical cabinets are still live.
The aspiration system electrical cabinet (10) is present

depending on the model and the machine configuration
PROCEDURE
1- Set the "Q69LD" circuit breaker (9) in the aspiration

system cabinet (10) to position "0". 11 10
The lamp (11) goes out.
The aspirators stop.
The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B) 9
electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model.
1-008830-06-xx.svg
The "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler roller A 2 3 1

electrical cabinet (5) also isolates the hopper electrical
cabinet (2).
2- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper stop
button (7).
The light on the hopper start button (8) goes out.
1-008518-05-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
urning off the preform feeder CU-010 2/2
3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper

electrical cabinet (2) to position "0". B 2 1 3 8 7
The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (2) are
switched off.
1-008516-04-xx.svg
4- Position the "Q1KA" circuit

circu it breaker (4) in the unscrambler
5 4 6
roller electrical cabinet (5) to position "0".
The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (5) are
switched off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
5- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

1-008520-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-011 Turning off the main machine circuit 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

When the main circuit breaker (4) is open, the primary

electrical circuit is still live. see procedure "BCU-012
"BCU-012..
1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-006..
- "BCU-009..
PCC switched off, see procedure "BCU-009 4
PROCEDURE 2

The lamp in the button (2) goes out.
2- Turn the key on the general switch (3) to "0".
3- Open the main circuit breaker Q1 (4). 5
The power lamp (5) goes out.
The machine and preform feeder primary circuit is now 1
isolated.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
4- Lock out the main switch (4).

3
1-006263-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
urning off the main machine circuit CU-011 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-012 Isolating the machine 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

The PLC is designed to cope with power failures,

however SIDEL recommends that you follow the
procedure below.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
Circuit breaker 3
Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling
Q1A
protection
Q1B Protection for the on-board component
Q1C 24 Vcc 40 A supply protection
Q1D 24 Vcc 20 A supply protection 6
Q1E 24 Vcc poles protection

Q1F 24 V input/ouput protection
Q1G 230 V transformer up-circuit protection
Q1H 230 V transformer down-circuit protection 5
Q1AD 24 V connection protection

Q109A Lighting protection
Q13AA Cabinet cooling system protection
4
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-006..
1-007067-04-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
solating the machine CU-012 2/2
1- Turn off the utility supplies to the machine, see

procedure "BCU-008.
"BCU-008.
2- Turn off the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-010
"BCU-010..
3- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009.
"BCU-009.
4- Isolate the main machine power circuit, see
procedure "BCU-011.
"BCU-011.
5- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet .
When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (3) on the
corresponding power module will light up, indicating a
battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty,
SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the
batteries, see procedure "BDE-001.
"BDE-001.
6- Set the main switch (4) to "STOP".
7- Set the power module (6) standby switch (5) to position 1
"OFF".
8- Open the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit.
1-008633-01-xx.svg
9- Open the isolating switch "Q1A" (2).

The primary electrical circuit is now isolated.
The plc, the UPS and the cabinet cooling system are now
switched off. 1
BEFORE YOU FINISH
10- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

1-008533-02-xx.svg
1-008521-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-013 Using the JOG system 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.
To activate the JOG mode, the JOG unit (1) must be

connected to the stowage zone "Z0" at the control station
(2).
Activating the JOG mode will automatically block use of the
"BCU-014..
manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014
A thermal safety
safety device prevents
prevents misuse of
of the JOG.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MAchine production cannot be restarted until the JOG

mode has been disactivated.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
1
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 2

"BCU-005..
PROCEDURE
1-006266-01-xx.svg
F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band
(A) at the PCC.
· If necessary, reset fault on the PCC. see
procedure "BCU-026,
"BCU-026,
2- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at the
control station (2).
3- Press the (3)
(3) key.
The "Settings" family appears.
4- Press the (4)
(4) key.
The (B) window appears.
1-006265-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
sing the JOG system CU-013 2/4

The secure low pressure air system of the machine is A
supplied.
The nozzle and stretch cylinders are in raised position
and do not inhibit the rotation of the machine..
F Check w hether the operation requir
requires
es the activation of the
low pressure air system.
If yes.
If not.
· Press the (5) key.
The secure low pressure air system of the
machine is no longer supplied.
6- Disconnect the JOG.
machine.
Only the doors in the relevant zone may be opened
without causing the machine to stop. 3
8- Connct the JOG unit (1) to the socket corresponding to
1-006403-10-02.svg
the work zone on the machine.
9- Depress the button (6) (and keep it pressed in).
The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 9
The button (7) is a secure stop button, it functions in the

same way as the door open safety features. The button
(7) can be held in stop position.
The machine stops and the brake engages.
The machine is in the desired position.
1-010353-03-02.svg
11- Repeat steps 9 to 10 . to set the machine to the required

B 5 8
positions.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
12- Disconnect the JOG.

1-010349-02-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-013 Using the JOG system 2
14- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at the
control station (2). 6 7
F If necessary, press button (5) to deactivate the supply of
the secure low pressure air system.
The window (B) disappears from the screen.

The "Welcome" family page appears.
1-006268-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
sing the JOG system CU-013 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-014 Using manual rotation 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Before rotating the machine, always make sure that

there are no personnel located at positions not visible
from the cranking point.
For interventions involving 2 technicians and using the

manual rotation system, the 2 technicians must
communicate clearly with each other to coordinate their
actions during any procedures.
1-006030-17-xx.svg
When rotating manually, always turn

tu rn the machine in the
normal direction of production (except when following
specific SIDEL instructions).
instructions). 1
Never rotate the machine by more than half a complete

revolution in the opposite direction to normal
production.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"Settin gs",
- procedure
JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013,
"BCU-013,
- manual rotation unrestricted. see procedure "BSU-002,
"BSU-002,
1-010353-04-02.svg
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
PROCEDURE
Raising the nozzle and stretching cylinders

A
The secure low pressure air system of the machine is
supplied.
The nozzle and stretch cylinders stop in raised position.
3- Press the (2) key. 2
The secure low pressure air system of the machine is no
longer supplied.
Using manual rotation
Never use
machine a crank
safety other than the one fitted on the
system.
L 1-010342-02-02.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
sing manual rotation CU-014 2/2
Comply with the procedure that requires manual

rotation to select the electric circuits that must be
shutdown.
5- If need be, shutdown: the PCC, the main electric circuit
and the upstream electric circuit, see
procedure "BCU-004,
"BCU-004, see procedure "BCU-002
"BCU-002,, see
procedure "BCU-001.
"BCU-001.
machine.
F Make sure that the stretchi
stretching
ng and nozzle cylinders are in
the raised position.
7- Remove the crank (4) from the safety system (5).
Removing the crank (4) from the safety system (5) will
be detected by the sensor "B12.5" which will prevent
the machine from operating automatically.
Depending on the model, the machine is equipped with

either a type "A" or type "B" crank.
8- Engage the hand crank (4) on the motor shaft .
A 5 3 4 5 4
9- Depress the button (3) (and keep it pressed in).
The blow wheel brake is open.
10- Turn the hand crank (4) until you reach the required
position.
Steps 9 and 10 are carried out simultaneously by the
same technician.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006603-08-xx.svg
The blow wheel brake is closed. B 3 4 5 4
12- Remove the hand crank (4).
13- Stow the crank (4) back on its safety system (5).
If the crank (4) is not correctly positioned on the safety
system (5) the machine will not operate automatically.
1-006908-09-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-015 Running the machine in Manual mode 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
"Manual" mode is reserved for production trials and

when setting up the machine.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
machine, see procedure "BPU-005.
"BPU-005.
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
activated
application
on as A
per your machine configurat
configuration.
ion.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Option

selection", in the User manual.
F Check that the setpoint values (A) are coherent.
·
If the values do not correspond to those in the
production set-up, modify them.
2- Select Manual mode on the blowing machine using the
key (2).
3- Select "Automatic"
"Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see
procedure "BCU-019.
"BCU-019.
Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are
2
If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the preform
feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see
1-006403-12-02.svg
procedure "BCU-034.
"BCU-034.
Oven heating and cooling start.
The stretching/preblowing/blowing operations are ready
for operation.
The preform feeder is operating.
The key (7) will flash until the oven has reached the
3 4 5 6 7
required temperature for preform feeding to begin.
When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms
1-006707-02-xx.svg
will begin to feed into the machine.
Bottle production trials begin.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
unning the machine in Manual mode CU-015 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
During a production cycle, do not press the key (3)

(except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will
stop automatically
automaticall y with the preforms still in the oven and
articles being blown. Clearing these items will be
difficult and will complicate the restart of production.
production.
Preform feeding stops.
The preform feeder stops.
Wait for the last bottle to exit the machine.

The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will
continue for another 2 minutes.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-016 Inspecting the preforms on delivery 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The testing procedure will be carried out by the quality control
laboratory according to the regulations in place in the
production facility.
Chemical tests
test s must be carried out on each batch of preforms
delivered.
When handling preforms, hands must be washed and
disinfected and gloves worn.
The sample preforms must be disposed of after

testing. 1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths,
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- box cutter, (solid non-slap blade).
PROCEDURE
Inspecting the storage area

F Inspect the cleanness of the storage a rea.
F Make sure that the storage area is well ventilated
ventilated and that
the temperature and the h ygrometry are monitored (only
small variations).
F Make sure that the storage area is sealed against the
entry of moisture, insects and other nuisances.
Inspecting the packaging
Only open boxes near the preform hopper.
Always wear latex gloves when handling the packaging

or its contents.
F Make su re that the description on the label corresponds
to the references on the purchase order.
F Check the general appearance of the box, looking
especially for damage, tears or traces of external
moisture.
F Check that the plastic bag containing the preforms is
inside a clean, sealed
sealed cardboard box and does not show
any signs of moisture or mould.
F Check that the preforms have been supplied in a
complete, clean, dry, airtight plastic bag.
F Make sure that the plastic bag does not contain any
foreign objects such as insects, preform debris or other
items.
Visual inspection of the preforms
L
E Wear latex gloves.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspecting the preforms on delivery CU-016 2/2
1- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check that the preforms correspond to the contractual
drawings and dimensions.
F Make sure that the preforms do not have any kind of
deformity (curved, oval, stuck together etc.).
F Make sure there are no scratches, grooves, traces of
impact or sticking.
F Check the appearance of the seal plane (thickness, no
displacement).
F Chec k that the injection points are small, salient and free
from burring.
F Make sure that the thread on the neck has been correctly
injected and is fully formed.
F Make sure that the rim is perfectly smooth and flat.
flat.
Checking for preform contamination
Wear latex gloves.
2- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check the m icrobe load in the preforms.
F Make sure that there are no traces of chem ical products.
Inspections during loading
F
When loading preforms, make sure that the packaging
has been opene d cleanly (using a box cutter will pr
prevent
event
the creation of packaging particles).
F Make sure that there are no foreign objects in the
packaging.
3- Discard any preforms that fall from the production line or
that have been handled.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Corrective measures
F Check the other boxes in the batch.
4- Remove any container which does not pass the
inspection procedures indicated above.
5- Contact the supplier following the contractual quality
control procedure.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-017 Clearing preforms from the feeder 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always empty the hopper before clearing the

unscrambler rollers.
The buttons (17 ; 18) located on the unscrambler roller

unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform
elevator start/stop" key (16) on the lower display bar of
the PCC.
1-006030-59-xx.svg
The PCC screen display(s) may differ

dif fer depending on the
model and the configuration of the machine.
MACHINE STATUS 18 17

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
1-006375-08-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- mobile external conveyor (option),
(option),
-
drain pan.
PROCEDURE
1- Position the external mobile conveyor (1) (option) or the

recycle bin under the clearance gate (2) of the hopper
(3).
1
1-006636-00-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
learing preforms from the feeder CU-017 2/4
2- Pull the handle (4) to unlock the

t he clearance gate (2) on the
hopper (3). 19 20
3- Raise the clearance gate (2) of the hopper (3).

3
4- Pull back the holding
holdin g pin (19) and position the hole on the
locking rod (20) in line with the axis of the pin (19).
2
5- Release the pin (19).
The clearance gate (2) is blocked in the raised position.
6- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the 4
hopper clearance chute.
· Position the bin under the external mobile conveyor
(1) (option).
· Start the external mobile conveyor (1) (option), refer
to the technical documentation supplied with the 1-010331-01-xx.svg
conveyor.
5 15 6
Empty the hopper
Clearance by the hopper is confirmed.

10- Enter a setpoint value of 30 % using the key (8).
12- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key
(15).
The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.
1-008464-05-02.svg
13- Press the key (16).

16
F
The
Wait hopper
until thebegins
hopperitsisemptying
em pty. cycle.
1-006704-05-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-017 Clearing preforms from the feeder 2
Emptying the unscrambler rollers

A 7 9
Clearance by the unscrambler rollers is confirmed.
15- Enter a setpoint value of 30 % using the key (10).
The elevator column and the unscrambler rollers begin
their clearance cycles.
F Wait until the elevator column and the rollers are clear of
preforms.
17- Press keys (11 ; 12).
The conveyor belts on the preforms feeder stop.
18- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the
hopper clearance chute. 11 8 12 10
· Stop the external mobile conveyor (1) (option).
Clearing the infeed rail 1-007478-05-02.svg
19- Position the collecting bin under the infeed rail.

20- Slightly loosen the grip-nut (13).
21- Slide the guide rail (14).
22- Remove the preforms from the infeed rail and from below
13
the infeed rail.
23- Position the guide rail (14).
24- Tighten the grip-nut (13).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

14
The preform feeder stops.
26- Press keys (7 ; 9).
27- Remove any preforms which have remained in the
system (chutes, hopper, conveyor belts etc.).
29- Remove the external mobile conveyor (1) (option).
30- Pull back the pin (19) and hold the clearance gate (2) of 1-006271-02-xx.svg
the hopper (3).

31- Release the pin (19).
32- Lower the clearance gate (2) until the locking handle
engages (4).
33- Remove the collecting bin from beneath the infeed rail.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
learing preforms from the feeder CU-017 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-018 Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Normal operation of the stationary part of the machine

requires a pressure of 7 bar. The braking system is
designed to operate at 7 bar. Below this level it will not
function in the same way.
The pressure value for the low pressure circuit (A) is

indicated in the "Wheel" family.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001.
"BCU-001.
1-006030-04-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
F Check the pressure at the gauge (1).
2- Lift the button (2).
The button (2) is released.
3- Turn the button (2) until you reach the required pressure.
The pressure gauge (3) indicates the pressure in the
circuit.
4- Lower the button (2).
The button (2) is locked.
1-010358-02-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the pressure on the low pressure air system CU-018 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH 2
F Check the operating pressure.

· Reset the operating pressure level if required.
1 3
1-006273-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-019 Operating the feeder in Automatic mode 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

Automatic mode on the preform feeder is the normal

operating mode. Automatic mode on the feeder allows
the speed on the elevator column to auto-adapt.
For more information on the preform feeder auto-adapt

function, see procedure "BPU-003.
"BPU-003.

dif fer depending on the 1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 2

"BCU-001,
machine, see
see procedure "BPU-005
"BPU-005.
PROCEDURE
activated
application
on as
configuration.
ion.

""Options" family" chapter in the User manual.
2- Select Automatic mode on the preform feeder, using the
key (2).
F Check the start setpoint values produced by the
production recipe loaded.
1-008464-13-02.svg
3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start
instructions in Auutomatic mode, see
procedure "BPU-017.
"BPU-017.
4- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006 or see
procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
The plc pilots the preform feeder with the start instruction
setpoint for the elevator column, which results from the
auto-adapt calculation.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
5- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see

procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
perating the feeder in Automatic mode CU-019 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BCU-020 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
2 1 3

5
Apply the procedure

procedure relevant to the tripped torque
limiter.
If there is a preform decontamination module (option 6

according to the model), the torque limiter (6) is fitted
on the machine.
1-007205-07-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 1
"BCU-005,,
- "BCU-013..
JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013
PROCEDURE
1-006344-01-xx.svg
Drive system (1) torque limiter

machine.
2- Reset the the torque limiter (1) using the manual rotation
"BCU-014..
system, see procedure "BCU-014
A
The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears
from the message band (A) on the PCC.
Infeed wheel torque limiter (2)
1-006403-13-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
esynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped CU-020 2/4

machine.
5- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be
obstructing the rotation of the machine. 2
6- Reset the torque limiter (2) by manually turning
turnin g the infeed
wheel in the normal direction of operation.
40 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3)
machine.
1-006345-01-xx.svg
obstructing the rotation of the machine.
Never turn the blow wheel backwards by more than half
a complete revolution (risk of mechanical damage).
For the 40 mm pitch oven, restarting in the normal

direction will not re-synchronize. The non-synchronized
message displays at the PCC. The machine cannot
restart.
"Transmission" chapter in the User manual.
10- Reset the torque limiter (3) by turning the blow wheel
backwards using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
3
50 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3)
machine.
14- Reset the the torque limiter (3) using the manual rotation
"BCU-014..
system, see procedure "BCU-014 1-006346-01-xx.svg

Bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter (5)
machine.
18- Reset the torque limiter (5) by manually turning the blow
wheel in the normal direction of production.
5
L
E
1-006583-01-xx.svg ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BCU-020 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
20- Check the synchronization of the machine before starting

production, see procedure "BNM-012
"BNM-012..
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
esynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped CU-020 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-021 User management 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Each user level must include at least 1 user.
The "User management" window allows the

administrator to:
- display user accounts, their levels and their
passwords,
- modify user levels and their passwords,
- create and delete user accounts.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
- PCC application connected in the name of an
administrator, see procedure "BCU-024.
"BCU-024.
PROCEDURE

The "Options" family appears.
Creating a new user account
The (C) window appears.
1 2
1-007626-02-02.svg
5- press on the window (5).

The keyboard appears. A
6- Key in the name of the user using the keyboard, then
confirm. 3
The keyboard appears.
8- Key in the password using
using the keyboard, then confirm.
If the entries into the password fields (6 ; 7) are not the 1-010389-02-02.svg
same the password will not be accepted.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ser management CU-021 2/2
10- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then

confirm. B
11- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using the
key (8).
12- Authorize or not
not the automatic delogin
delogin of a user account
account
using the key (9).
13- Define the level of a user using the keys (10).
The new account has now been created.
The window (C) disappears from the screen.
Modify an existing user account
15- Press on the user name.
The (D) window appears. 1-010385-02-02.svg
Modify the password and the automatic delogin

17- Key in the new password using the ketyboard, then
C 5 6
confirm.
If the entries into the password fields (12 ; 13) are not
the same the password will not be accepted.
19- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then
confirm.
20- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using the
key (14).
7 8 9 10 11
21- Authorize or not
not the automatic delogin
delogin of a user account
account
using the key (15). 1-006561-01-02.svg
Modify the level of a user
22- Define the level of a user using the keys (16).
The modifcations have now been saved.
The window (D) disappears from the screen.
Delete a user account D 12 18

24- Press on the user name.
The (D) window appears.
The user account has been deleted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
26- If necessary, close the session to prohibit access to non-

administratorr users.
administrato
The procedure is now complete. 13 14 15 16 17
1-006562-01-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-022 Alarm configuration 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pressing the key (1) will increment the corresponding

alarm level.
The keys (2 ; 3 ; 4) select the alarm tone associated

associated with
the corresponding "Information" alarm:
- (2) no alarm tone.
- (3) alarm tone for 8 s.
- (4) continuous alarm tone.
1-006030-14-xx.svg

7
""Alarms" family" chapter in the User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
8
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004..
PROCEDURE
A 2 3 4 1
1-008989-02-02.svg

The "Alarms" family appears.
The (A) window displays the top of the alarm list.
F Check the alarm configuration.
4- If necessary, change the configuration
config uration of the alarms using
the keys (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
5- Scroll down the list using the key (8).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Repeat as above from stage 4 until you have completed

the settings for all of the alarms.
5 6
1-006948-02-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
larm configuration CU-022 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-023 Acknowledging information and alert alarms 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For more details on the definitions for the "Critical" and

"Alert" alarms and critical and progessive shutdowns
which result from them, please refer to chapter
""Alarms" family", in the

t he User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
1- If the application PCC is not at the "Welcome" family,

2 3
press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm.
Information alarms
F Acknowledge the fault.
2- Press the acknowledge key (1).
The messages on the scrolling band (3) in the window
(A) disappear.
Alert alarms
F Acknowledge the fault.
The alarm siren and lamps will stop.
The alarm remains on the display.
F Correct the fault.
The key (2) returns to its original state.
4 1
(A) disappear.
5- Press the (4) key. 1-006403-02-02.svg
The machine starts.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Close the window (A).

1-010017-03-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
cknowledging information and alert alarms CU-023 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-024 User login / logout 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Only authorized personnel are permitted to operate the

machine.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE 1


The keyboard (B) appears.
3- Enter the user name using the keyboard (B).
The keyboard (B) appears.
6- Enter the password using the keyboard (B).
1-006077-10-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH A 2

The start of the user shift has been confirmed.
5 6
At the end of th
the
e sh
shift
ift press
press the
the ke
key
y (6)
(6) to clo
close
se the
the user
user 1-006563-01-02.svg
session.
B 3
1-006564-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ser login / logout CU-024 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-025 Entering numerical values 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Values can be modifed using the numerical keypad.
For entering or modifying a date, see

procedure "BCU-028.
"BCU-028.
PROCEDURE
1 Minimum value selection key

2 Maximum value selection key 1-006030-14-xx.svg
3 Key to delete value shown one figure at a time
4 Key to delete entire value shown
5 Key to display the last confirmed value
Key to confirm the value displayed and close the
6
keypad
1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

A 2
The numerical keypad (A) appears.
The value entered must fall between the minimum (1) 3
1
and maximum (3) values.
4
2- Enter the required value through the keypad (A) or press
keys (1) or (2) to select the minimum and maximum 5
values.
6
The value displayed is confirmed and the keypad
disappears from the screen. 1-006398-04-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the value shown on the PCC.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ntering numerical values CU-025 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-026 Acknowledging critical alarms 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
For more details on the definitions for the "Critical" and

"Alert" alarms and critical and progessive shutdowns
which result from them, please refer to chapter
""Alarms" family", in the

t he User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
1- If the application PCC is not at the "Welcome" family,

2 3
press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm.
The alarm siren and lamps will stop.
The alarm remains on the display.
F Correct the fault.

The key (2) returns to its original state.
(A) disappear.
(4).
The machine starts.
The bottles and preforms will be ejected from the transfer
arms until the machine is completely clear. 5 4 1
1-006403-03-02.svg
F Check the meeting points and make sure that the
machine is running correctly. A
No incidents have been detected.

· Press the (5) key.
The machine stops.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006.

"BCU-006.
1-010017-03-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
cknowledging critical alarms CU-026 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-027 Configuring access to application functions 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Access to functions which change the status of the

machine can only be set by a user with administrator-
level access.

"Operating levels" chapter in the User manual.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
"BCU-004..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
1
Consumables
None 1-006288-02-xx.svg
Specific tools
- mouse with "USB" type connection.
PROCEDURE
1- Open the cover flap (1) at the PCC.

2- Connect the mouse to the "USB" port on the front of the
PCC.
3- Position the cursor over the button you wish to configure.
4- Right click on the mouse.
The pop-up menu (A) appears.
5- Modify the access level to this function as required.
A
6- Repeat as above from step 3 until
until you have completed all
access configurations.
configurations.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
7- Disconnect the moouse.

1-007071-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
onfiguring access to application functions CU-027 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-028 Entering the date 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Dates can be entered and modified using the keyboard.
For entering and modifyng numerical information, see

procedure "BCU-028.
"BCU-028.
PROCEDURE
1 Current date displayed in window (A)

2 Go to previous month
3 Go to previous year 1-006030-14-xx.svg
4 Go to following year
5 Go to following month
6 Day selection keys
1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

The (A) window appears. A 1
2- Select the year

The calendar using
(B) the keys (3 ; 4).
updates. 2 5
3- Select the month using the keys (2 ; 5). 3 4
The calendar (B) updates.
4- Select the day using the keys (6).
The date has been modified and the window (A) B
disappears. 6
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the date displayed at the PCC.
The procedure is now complete. 1-008213-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ntering the date CU-028 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-034 Operating the preform feeder in manual mode 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

"Manual mode" is a downgraded operating mode for the

preform feeder which allows production to continue
when there is a fault at the "D5" count sensor.
When "Manual" mode for the feeder has been selected,

the automated regulation system (auto-adapt) is no
longer in operation.
1-006030-14-xx.svg

1 2
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
machine, see
see procedure "BPU-005
"BPU-005..
PROCEDURE
activated
application
on as
configuration.
ion.

2- Select Manual mode on the preform feeder using the key
(2).
F Check the start setpoint values produced by the
production recipe loaded.
1-008848-08-02.svg
3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start
instruction setpoints in Manual mode, see
procedure "BPU-017.
"BPU-017.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Manual
mode" chapter in the Preform Feeder family in the User
manual.
procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Correct the sensor "D5" fault quickly in order to return

to full Automatic mode operation, see
procedure "BCU-019.
"BCU-019.

procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
perating the preform feeder in manual mode CU-034 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BCU-036 Vision system, access to the blower 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
PROCEDURE
Opening the camera support
1-006030-18-xx.svg

machine.
2- Loosen the grip nut (1).
3- Tilt the locking handle (2). 2

5- Rotate the support (4) and the table (5).
Rotate the support (4) and the table (5) with caution.
Closing the camera support

6- Rotate the support (4) and the table (5) as far as they will
go.
8- Tighten the grip-nut (3). 4
5
9- Tilt the locking handle (2).
Removing the electrical unit
3
1-007490-01-xx.svg

machine.
12- Slide the electrical unit (7) as far as it will go.
Fitting the electrical unit
13- Slide the electrical unit (7) as far as it will go.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

7 6
1-007442-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ision system, access to the blower CU-036 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
User procedure
Production process procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting points "P0" and "P10" ......................................................................
...................................................................................................................
............................................. BPU-001
Setting the blowing pressure ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... BPU-002
Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder ......................................................
........................................................................................
.................................. BPU-003
Output rate setpoint ..............................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... BPU-004
Recipe management ................................................................................................................................. BPU-005
Solenoid valve test .................................................................................................................................... BPU-006
Oven test ...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... BPU-007
Preform feeder test ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................. .................................. BPU-008
Setting the parameters of the process ...................................................................................................... BPU-009
Carrying out a tr
trial
ial on a new production process ...................................................................................... BPU-010
Mechanical settings for the lamps ............................................................................................................. BPU-011
Setting the preblowing pressure ........................................................................................................
................................................. ..............................................................
....... BPU-012
Checking the preblow flow setting .....................................................................................................
................................................. ...........................................................
....... BPU-013
Checking the feeder preform count ........................................................................................................... BPU-014
Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors ...................................................................... BPU-015
Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints .....................................
.............................................................................
..................................................
.......... BPU-017
Initializing the preform feeder production start .......................................................................................... BPU-027
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
D
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure
1/4 BPU-001 Setting points P0 and P10 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
In order to set points "P0" and "P10" the lower stretching

"BRM-009..
thrusts must first be set, see procedure "BRM-009
This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians:

- The first technician rotates the machine using the
manual rotation system,
- the first technician activates and disactivates the
controls at the PCC,
- the second technician check the position
posit ion of the roller
(1) on the stretching cam (2). 1-006030-33-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
2
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005,, 1-006511-01-xx.svg
- high pressure air circuit supply on, see

procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- certified standard preforms for the type
type of production
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production pr
process
ocess procedure Part B
etting points P0 and P10 PU-001 2/4
à traduire
3
machine.
2- Insert a preform into the grip corresponding to the
selected mold.
3- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of the
stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
The "Wheel" family appears.
1-007565-04-02.svg

The (B) window appears. A
8- Enter the number of the mold using the keys (6).
The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now
active.
The stretching cylinder is forced downwards.
11- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2)
using the manual rotation system, see
1-007570-02-02.svg
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
12- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the
6 B
stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine.
The stretching rod has now reached the bottom of the
preform, this is point "P0".
à traduire "P0".
The stretching cylinder * 1 stops at the up-position.
à traduire 8 7 9 10
15- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of the
1-007574-02-02.svg
stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
The preform will be ejected at the bottle transfer.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BPU-001 Setting points P0 and P10 3

The stretching cylinder is forced downwards. 2
17- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2)
using the manual rotation system, see 1
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
18- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the
stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine.
à traduire.
1-006514-01-xx.svg

à traduire "P10".
The stretching cylinder * 1 stops at the up-position.
cut off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

P0
P10
1-006510-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
etting points P0 and P10 PU-001 4/4
L
E
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-002 Setting the blowing pressure 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The synoptic may differ depending on the machine

model and its configuration but the setting procedure is
always the same.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
1- Press the (1) key. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

If necessary, press on button (2) to display the air
synoptic (A).
3- Enter the required pressure and confirm.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 3 2 A
1-007507-02-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
etting the blowing pressure PU-002 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-003 Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The auto-adapt system adjusts the speed of the

elevator column located immediately upstream
upst ream from the
unscrambler rollers in order to achieve a continuous
flow of preforms along the infeed rail and therefore not
disrupting production.
The auto-adapt function can be started when creating

a new production set up, modifying the the output rate
of the blowing machine or at any time during
production.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic" mode,
from the "Feeder" family.
The parameters determined by the auto-adaptation

process are recorded in the production recipe if the
operator saves the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.
"BPU-005.

MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
Before starting the auto-adapt cycle:

- enter the preform feeder start-up setpoints, see
procedure "BPU-017,
"BPU-017,
- load the appropriate recipe into the application, see
procedure "BPU-005,
"BPU-005,
- enter the production rate setpoint, see
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
The key (1) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+" 2 1

depending on whether the low or high speed has been
selected. 1-008464-11-02.svg
1- Select the low speed for the elevator column, using the
key(s) (1).
The blowing machine start cycle can be carried out in
Automatic or Manual mode. If the blowing machine
productoin set-up has not been defined in the PCC
application, start the machine in forced loading with
preform ejection activated.
The procedure below is described in Manual mode for

2- Start the blowing machine and the preform feeder, see
procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
uto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder PU-003 2/2
The start percentage for the elevator column (3) A 4

corresponds to its speed at the start of the auto-adapt
cycle.
4- Enter a start-up setpoint for the elevator column (3) of 60
%.
B
5- Press the (4)
A confirm windkey.
window
ow appears.
appears.
3
The preform feeder speed auto-adaptation cycle may 1-007549-04-02.svg
take several minutes.
The auto-adapt cycle stops when the feeder has

operated over a time pre-defined by the plc and at a
sufficient level of preforms in the stabilization rail with
the blowing machine stop pin open.
6- Press the appropriate key to confirm the start of the auto-
adaptation cycle.
The key (4) flashes during the auto-adapt phase.
The preform feeder is operating.
7- Authorize preform loading into the blowing machine using
6 5
the key (5).
F Wait for the end of the cycle.
cycl e.
The reference speed calculated is shown
show n in the window
(B).
F Check that the reference value calculat
calculated
ed is below *1. 1-006704-14-xx.svg
If yes.
If not.
· Stop the preform loading using the key (5).
· Stop the preform feeder using the key (6).
· Select high speed for the elevator column(s)
using the key(s) (1).
· Repeat as above from step 4 .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

9- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
10- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.
"BPU-005.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-004 Output rate setpoint 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Caution: modifying the "Output rate" will automatically

generate a recalculation of the production timings by
the plc. The quality of the production may be altered.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 3

"BCU-001,
- PCC application set to the "Welcome" family.
PROCEDURE

2- Enter the setpoint.
The setpoint has now been modifed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the output rate value (3).
1-006403-16-02.svg
1-006398-03-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
utput rate setpoint PU-004 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-005 Recipe management 3
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE

The "Recipe" family appears.
Drive selection
2- Press the key (2) corresponding to the source drive you
require.
The key changes status.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
The recipes present on the drive will be displayed in the
recipe list (A).
Loading a recipe into the machine
3- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list
lis t (A).
1 12 11 3 A
The key (3) is no longer masked.
The recipe is now loaded into the machine.
Deleting a recipe or recipes
5- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A).
A confirm window
window appears.
appears.
7- Press the key corresponding to the required operation.
Printing a recipe or recipes
The entire content of a recipe will be printed by default.
8- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A).
14 9 8 13 4 5 2
1-007760-02-02.svg

B 7
10- Press the key (6) to activate or disactivate the print out of
the page(s).
11- Turn the recipe pages using the keys in zone (C).
The window (B) disappears from the screen.
13- Repeat as above, from step 8 , to configurate the
printouts for the other recipes.
14- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A).
The recipes selected from the recipe list (A) will print out.
Copying a recipe or recipes
16- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A). C 6 C
1-010421-01-02.svg
L
E 18- Select the drive you require using the keys (10).
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
ecipe management PU-005 2/2
The recipes will be copied to the selected drive.

Saving a recipe
Saving a new recipe
20- Enter the name of the new recipe using the keyboard.
The new recipe is created and saved. D
Saving an existing recipe

The new recipe overwrites the existing recipe in the list
(A). 1-010410-01-02.svg
Recovering a deleted recipe
The (E) window appears.
23- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (F).
The recipe is reloaded into the list of recipes (A).
25- Press the (16)

The window (E)key.
disappears from the screen.
Exporting a recipe
26- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A).
28- Select the drive you require using the keys (10).
The recipe is exported to the selected reader. E 15 F 16
1-007602-02-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-006 Solenoid valve test 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attempt any work on the machine

machi ne during a "Fixed
or mobile solenoid valve test":
- doors open, the machine is energised (water,
electricity, air etc.).

""Settings" family.
The test windows in the "Settings" family are only

accessible
accessibl e if all of the machine safety doors are closed.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
PROCEDURE
Blowing test
1- Position the blowing station to be tested at the rear of
the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
The blowing station to be tested will
wil l be in the machine's
white zone (B).
3- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys
(2).
The number of the blowing station selected appears in the
1 10
zone (C).
4- Press the (3) key. 1-010353-05-02.svg
active.
7 9 A 15
The high pressure air supply to the blowing station is now
on.
6
Activating the preblow and blow solenoid valves will B
cause a lot of noise if the mold is empty. You can place 14
a small metal plate (make sure that it is clean and
5
smooth) on the mold for the nozzle to rest on. This will
reduce the noise when testing the valves on an empty 4
mold.
3
Briefly activate the preblow and blow solenoids causing
the noise. C
2
The nozzle tip drops down.
1-010342-03-02.svg
L
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
olenoid valve test PU-006 2/2
The lamps (13) will light up when the corresponding 13

solenoid is active.
The blowing station is now at preblowing pressure.
The blowing station is no longer at preblow pressure.
The blowing station is at blowing pressure.
The blowing station is no longer at blowing pressure.
11- Press the (8) key, (option).
The blowing air is recoverd in the recovery circuit.
12- Press the (8) key, (option).
The recovery solenoid is deactivated.
The blowing air is cleared through the exhaust .
1-006409-01-xx.svg
The exhaust solenoid is disactivated.
15- Press the (14) key, (option according to model).
The blowing station is at compensation pressure.
16- Press the (14) key, (option according to model).
The blowing station is no longer at compensation
pressure.
· If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key
"Oui" on the window that appears.
Testing the solenoids on the fixed section
11 D E 12
The machine is now supplied with low pressure air.
20- Test the solenoids one after the other by pressing the
corresponding keys in the zone (E).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

· If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key
"Oui" on the window that appears.
1-010348-03-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-007 Oven test 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The "Oven test" window allows you to check the oven

lamps.

""Settings" family.

accessible
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001 ,
PROCEDURE

2- Select the half of the oven to be tested using key (2).
The key (2) indicates the half of the oven selected.
3- Select the zone to be activated using the keys (3).
The zone changes to yellow.
5- Enter the heating percentage for the zone to be tested.
It is possible to check the ventilation system by 1
modifying the setpoint using the key (5). The minimum
default value is 30 %. 1-010353-06-02.svg

A
The heating zone selected lights up. 7
7- Select the next test zone using the keys (3).
The zone changes to yellow. 3
8- If necessary, modify the heating percentage in the zone
using the key (4).
9- Repeat as above from steps 3 until you
you have tested all
all
of the oven zones. 2 4
The heating zone selected goes out.
6 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006421-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
ven test PU-007 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BPU-008 Preform feeder test 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

accessible
The "Feeder test" window (A) allows the user to activate

the controls for the various components of the preform
feeder separately in order to test and adjust each of
them.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
Opening any of the safety doors will stop the operation

of the elements selected in the "Feeder test" window
(A).

""Settings" family.
The minimum default value for the preform feeder

speed setpoints is *1.

MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
- PCC application in "Manual" mode,
1
PROCEDURE
1-010353-07-02.svg
The low pressure air supply to the preform feeder is now
active.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
reform feeder test PU-008 2/4
Unscrambler roller operating test

3- Press the (3) key. B A 14
4- Key in the value of the rotation order for the unscrambler
rollers, then confirm.
5- Press the button (4)

The unscrambler and are
rollers release.
selected. 2
Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator

start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is
8
activated.
9
3 11 13 12 10
1-010351-03-02.svg

5
The unscrambler rollers are in operation.
The
framebuttons (6 ; same
have the 7) located on the
function astunscrambler
the "Preformroller unit
elevator
start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar of the
PCC. The keys (6 ; 7) allow the user to start and stop 1-006704-02-xx.svg
the various components of the unscrambler rollers
selected in the "Feeder test" window
windo w in order to observe
their performance in contact with the preforms.
F Check the performance of the various components.
7- Press the button (4) and release.
The unscrambler rollers are stopped.
Elevator column operation test 7 6
9- Enter the elevator motor setpoint.

activated.
The conveyor belt on the elevator is now in operation.
1-006375-07-xx.svg
F Check the performance of the various components.
The conveyor belt on the elevator column is stopped.
Performance test on the elevator column of the mini-hopper
(option according to model)
13- Enter the setpoint instruction for the mini-hopper motor.
activated.
L
The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now operational. E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BPU-008 Preform feeder test 3
F Check the performance of the various com ponents.

The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now stopped.
Hopper conveyor belt operating test
17- Enter the setpoint for the hopper motor.
activated.
The hopper belt is functioning.
The hopper belt is now stopped.
Other operating tests

activated.
20- Test the functions one after the other by pressing the
corresponding key in the zone (B), please refer to
chapter The "Feeder test" window in the "Settings"
window in the User manual.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The selected elements are stopped.
If all of the functions are not deactivated a
confirmation window appears.
· Press the key corresponding to the required
operation.
The
The window (A)isdisappears
procedure from the screen.
now complete.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
reform feeder test PU-008 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-009 Setting the parameters of the process 3
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE

1-006030-14-xx.svg
3- Activate "Manual"
"Manual" mode using
using button (3).
(3).
1 2
Manual mode active.
4- Select the type of production in Zone (B).
5- Enter the article's capacity (4).
The parameters (5) may then be refined.
These parameters may be refined in order to improve
regulation performance.
As a general
general rule, these parameters
parameters can be set to
obtain:
- a preblow start up with a minimum of 0/10 and a
maximum of +1/10 relative to the baseline process,
- and a pressure with a minimum limit of -2 bar and a
maximum of +2 bars relative to the baseline
process.
6- Enter a weight setpoint (6) for the article bases.
7- Enter a weight setpoint tolerance (7) for the article bases
of +/-0.10 g.
1-007565-09-02.svg
The tolerance must be less than the article

specifications. A
5
8- Enter a correction (8) coefficient for individual regulation
of +0,8. B
9- Enter a correctio coefficient (9) for overall regulation of 4
-0,3.
7
These parameters should subsequently be refined in 13 9
order to adapt the regulation performance
perfo rmance to the type of
article. 6 3
10- Enter a correction frequency (10) for production start up
8 12
of 10.
11- Enter a correction frequency for individual regulation 10 11
(11).
12- Enter a correction frequency for overall regulation (12). 1-007576-02-02.svg
The correction frequencies for individual and overall

regulation must all be the same and be greater than the
th e
production start up correction frequency.
L These parameters may be refined in order to improve

E
D
I
regulation performance.
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
etting the parameters of the process PU-009 2/2
13- Enter the top of the weight measurement (13) for the
article bases.
This value is a reminder and is not part of the regulation
calculation.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
14- Activate "Automatic"

"Automatic" mode using
using button (3).
(3).
"Automatic" mode selected.
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BPU-010 Carrying out a trial on a new production process 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is not intended to train users in the

creation of a production set-up, it is designed to allow
technicians to set the machine up for the production of
a single item. This article may well serve for the initial
mechanical settings of the machine.
To be able to use this procedure you will need to be

highly familiar with the User manual and in particular
with the "Methodology for production set-up" chapter.
Complying with the specifications for an "HR" article

1-006030-53-xx.svg
requires more in-depth process knowledge than can be
presented in the context of this instruction.
For all developments and additional training, please

contact SIDEL.
This list of preliminary checks is intended for the initial

machine start-up.
To carry out this procedure you will require the Service

Procedure Catalogue.
This procedure must be carried out with the molds at

process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
- molds at production temperature.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- protective gloves (thermal),
- box cutter.
PROCEDURE
Preliminary
Preliminary checks
1- Check the user profiles, see procedure "BCU-021.
"BCU-021.
2- Make sure that the options required for the production set-
up have been activated (especially the "Push-up" option,
if needed) , please refer to chapter ""Options"
family" chapter in the User manual.
3- Check the machine parameter settings and PCC, please
refer to chapter
chapter ""Options" family"
family" chapter in the
the User
manual.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
arrying out a trial on a new production process PU-010 2/6
4- Make sure that the custom parts corresponding to the

preforms and items being produced are fitted on the
machine, please refer to chapter "Production item
changes" chapter in the User manual.
5- Check the alarm configuration, see
procedure "BCU-022
"BCU-022..
6- Checking the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
7- Verify that the "Push-up" pressure setting (if present) is
at 9 bar, please refer to chapter ""Wheel"
family" chapter in the User manual.
8- Check the preblow flow limiter settings, see
procedure "BPU-013.
"BPU-013.
9- Check the alarm levels for the fluid temperatures and
flows (usually a body temperature of around 140 °C and
a base and/or neck temperature of 75 °C) , please refer
to chapter ""Wheel" family" chapter
chapter in the User manual.
10- Check the settings of the inductive and photo-electric
sensors, see procedure "BRE-001
"BRE-001..
11- Solenoid valve tests, see procedure "BPU-006
"BPU-006..
12- Heating tests, see procedure "BPU-007
"BPU-007..
procedure
procedu re "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
14- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015
"BCU-015..
15- Set the preform feeder, see procedure "BPU-027.
"BPU-027.
16- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
Preliminary
Preliminary settings
Blow wheel
17- Set points "0" and "10", see proc
procedure
edure "BPU-001.
"BPU-001.
Oven
18- Set the number of lamps required to heat the preforms
according to their height.
19- Set the position of the lamps for
for all of the oven heating
modules, see procedure "BPU-011
"BPU-011..
20- Set the interior and exterior cooling shields, see
procedure
procedu re "BRM-010.
"BRM-010.
21- Set the focal point of the infrared camera(s), see
procedure "BRE-003.
"BRE-003.
22- Set the positions of the oven
ove n cooling dampers to the
the
middle position.
23- If the "black bars" option is present, set them outside the
heating zone for this first approach.
Setting up the production process
For further information, please refer to chapter "Setting

up the machine for production" chapter in the User
manual.
24- Set the temperatures for the mould regulation
circuits
a base (usually
(us uallyneck
and/or a body temperature
temperature of around
of 75 °C) . 140 °C and
Preblowing configuration
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
25- Set the preblow pressure to 8 bar, see

procedure "BPU-012
"BPU-012.. 1
The start of preblowing is expressed in tenths of the
stretching phase, with zero being the start of active
stretching.
26- Position the

preblowing to cursor
point "0"(1) at "1/10" to set the start of
+ 1/10.
Blowing configuration
27- Set the blow pressure to 38 bar, see
procedure "BPU-002
"BPU-002.. 1-007570-03-02.svg

The end of preblowing at point "10" is active.
- For items whose volume is less than 0,5 L, exhaust
time is set at 0,2 s.
- For items whose volume is less than 1,5 L, exhaust
- For items whose volume is greater than 1,5 L,
exhaust time is set at 0,5 s.
3
29- Key in a value for the exhaust time (3).
16
- For items with a volume of between 2 L and 1,5 L, 15
the sweep time is set at 0,8 s. 14
- For items with a volume of less than 1,5 L, sweep 2

30- Enter an air recovery time (16) (option). 1-010341-04-02.svg
- According to the volume of the article, the air

recovery time varies from 0.10 to 0.15 s.
31- Enter a sweep time value (14).
"Push-up" must start after the sweep and stop at the
start of the lowering of the mould base.
32- Enter the initial and fina "Push-up" angular positions using
the keys (15)
Heating setpoints
33- Balance the number of penetration and distribution ovens
using the keys (4).
34- Activation of lamps
lamps necessary
necessary on 40 % penetration
penetration oven
modules.
35- Activate the required lamps on 50 % distribution oven
modules.
36- Enter 100 % as a setpoint value for zone 1(A).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
37- Enter a value of between 80 and 100 % for the other

zones (B). C 4 B A 4
To achieve better penetration, the "overall heating %"

values should be between 80 and 100 %.
Oven configuration
38- Enter a "Go to standby" setpoint (5) of 40 %.

39- Enter a "Loading temperature" setpoint (6) of 120 °C.
Lower the "Loading temperature" setpoint if the time
taken to reach this level is too long.
40- Enter a "Cooling" setpoint (7) of 85 %.
"Manual" mode using
using button (13).
(13).
6 5 7 8 12 11
1-010338-03-02.svg
If the "Preform neck" and "Preform base" options are

validated, repeat the previous steps, from step 41 for
the windows "Preform neck temperature" (12) and
"Preform base temperature" (11).
Production set-up trials (in Manual mode)
Warning - risk of burns
Wear heat protection gloves.

"BCU-015.. 13
F Wait for the oven to reach the loading temperature.
1-007559-02-02.svg
44- Send around ten preforms through the oven and eject
them at the oven outfeed.
The preforms should be completely supple, even the

domes.
F Check the general temperature of the preforms by holding
them. E
If the preforms are supple and not crystallized (E).
· Go to step 46 .
If the preforms are almost supple.
· Increase the overall heating percentage 10 %.
If the preforms are hard.
· Increase the number of lamps in operation on the
hard areas.
If the preforms are completely crystallized.
· Reduce the number of lamps.
If the preforms are partially crystallized (D). D
· Reduce the overall heating percentage by 10 %.

1-006855-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
45- Repeat the previous steps, from step 44 , until the

required result is obtained. F
46- Test the preblowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the

blown items at the bottle outfeed.
F Check the general appearance of the preblown balloon.
If the preblown balloon is too small (F).
·
Increase the preblow pressure by 2 bar and if the
phenomenon continues bring the start of
preblowing forward.
If the preblown balloon is satisfactory (G).
· Go to step 48 .
If the preblown balloon is to big (H).
· Reduce preblowing pressure.
1-006856-01-xx.svg
47- Repeat the previous steps, from step 46 , until the
required result is obtained.
48- Test the blowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the blown
items at the bottle transfer.
F Check the shape of the bottles (I).
G
49- If necessary, adjust the various parts of the bottle outfeed
(gaps, height and synchronization).
Refining the production set-up

50- Note the positions of the heating zones on a preform
using a box cutter or a permanent marker.
The marked preform will serve as template.
F Check the temperature of the various preform sections
with regard to the heating zones using the template.
· If necessary, correct the heating profile by changing
the heating percentages and the number of active
lamps.
51- Note the position of the heating zones on the preforms 1-006857-01-xx.svg
using a box cutter or a permanent marker.
52- Test the blowing process on 1 wheel rotation.
F Make sure that the plastic material has been evenly
distributed between the shoulder and the base of the
bottle.
If the material is not evenly distributed.
distributed.
· Correct the preblow pressure.
F Use marked articles to check the distribution of the
material with regard to the heating zones. H
· If necessary, correct the heating profile.
53- Send in a number of preforms corresponding to half of the
oven's full capacity.
54- Raise the ambient oven temperature.
55- Refine the "Loading temperature" setpoint.
56- Note the temperature of the preforms at the
t he oven outfeed.
outfeed.
57- Refine the "Preform temperature" setpoint.
58- Note the output percentage value.
59- Refine the "Production start-up"
start-up" setpoint.
setpoint.
1-006858-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
F Make sure that the blown bottles conform to the

production specifications. I
· If they do not conform, start over the adjustments.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

using button (13).
(13).
For further information, please refer to chapter "Setting
up the machine for production" chapter in the User
manual.
"BPU-005.
F Check the stability of the set-up in production.
1-008360-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-011 Mechanical settings for the lamps 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never touch the lamps with your fingers.
Always hold the lamps by their

their ends.
Always wear clean,

clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
The position of the infrared lamps (1) (advanced or

center) is adjusted according to the production set
up. The shim stacks (4) allow you to adjust the position
of the lamps (1) on the rack (3). 3
MACHINE STATUS 2
-
all machine power and utilities turned off, see
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- oven cold.
1-006075-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
To faciltate tightening, the handles (2) can be
disengaged. 3
Depending on the configuration of your machine, these

elements (2) may vary visually but their functions
remain the same.
2- Loosen the handles (2). 5
3- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven.

1-006338-01-xx.svg
4- Pivot the cover

cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn.
6
5- Remove the covers (6).
1-006339-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
echanical settings for the lamps PU-011 2/2
6- Set the positions of the lamps (1) using the shims (4).
4
7- Position the covers (6).
8- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn.
1-008536-01-xx.svg

6
10- Tighten the handles (2).
1-006341-02-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006342-01-xx.svg

12- Enter the configuration you have created into the
"Comments" window in the "Oven" family. 2
1-006076-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-012 Setting the preblowing pressure 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg

2- If necessary, press on button (2) to display the air synoptic
(A).
4- Enter the required pressure and confirm.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 2 A 3
1-010355-03-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
etting the preblowing pressure PU-012 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-013 Checking the preblow flow setting 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005
PROCEDURE
1-006030-01-xx.svg
The value 150 is a default value. The value may be

changed when the final process set-up is effected.
Do not activate the low pressure air system in the

JOG implementation window.
1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
F Check that the display (1) reads 150. 1
If yes.
· Go to step 2 .
If not 3
· Continue with the procedure.
3- Loosen the bolt (2).
4- Set the display (1) to 150 using the knob (3). 2
5- Tighten the bolt (2).
6- Repeat stages 2 to 5 until the preblow flow has been
set on all of the blowing stations. 1-010704-01-xx.svg
7- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

"BCU-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
hecking the preblow flow setting PU-013 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

9- If necessary, press on button (5) to display the air synoptic
(A).
11- Enter the value "150".
The preblow flow entered at the PCC is an indicator
which has no incidence on the actual preblow flow
setting.
4 5 A 6
1-010355-02-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BPU-014 Checking the feeder preform count 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sensor
D3 Unscrambler roller exit B102.0
D4 Unscrambler
sensor roller anticipated start B103.3 3
D5 Upper count cell B105.0
1 Detection of preforms at top of rail B10.5 2
2 Detection of preforms at bottom of rail B10.6
3 Detection of preforms at machine infeed B32.1 1
D4
The sensor cells (D3 ; D4 ; D5 ; 1 ; 2 ; 3) must be first D5 D3
adjusted and set according to the production to be
done, see procedure "BRE-002
"BRE-002,, see 1-006030-122-xx.svg
procedure "BRE-014,
"BRE-014, see procedure "BRE-015
"BRE-015,, see
procedure "BPU-015.
"BPU-015.
Updating the infeed rail missing preform count (A) may

take several seconds.
The screen display(s) may differ depending on the 4 A

MACHINE STATUS
- unscramblerr roller assembly clear
unscramble clear of preforms,
- infeed rail clear of preforms.
Machine isolated
isolated except for:
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
1-008464-12-02.svg
- certified standard preforms for the type of production
being carried out.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
hecking the feeder preform count PU-014 2/4

machine.
Initializing the missing preform counter
Masks can be made out of pieces of cardboard affixed

with adhesive tape.
3- Place a mask on the sensors
sens ors (D3 ; D4 ; 1 ; 2).
F Wait for 1 minute(s).
F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the infeed
rail is at 0 .
4- Remove the mask from the sensors (D3 ; D4).
Checking the feeder preform count
Checking the count manually
5- Pass your hand 3 time in front of the (3) cell.
6- Pass your
your hand 1 time in front
front of the (D5) cell.
F Check that the missing preform counter
c ounter (A) on the infeed
rail is at 2 .
If yes.
If not.
·
Start the sensor adjustments and settings
again, see procedure "BRE-002,,
"BRE-002 see
procedure "BPU-015.
"BPU-015.
· Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing
preform count is correct.
Checking the sensor (D5)
F Check the operation of the sensor (D5), se e
procedure BRE-015.
BRE-015 .
Checking the count under production conditions
7- " and ", see above.
The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic" mode,
from the "Feeder" family.
8- Pass your hand 11 time in front of the (3) cell.
rail is at 11 .
9- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers .
procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
rail is at 1 .
If yes.
If not.
·
Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or
see procedure "BCU015.
· Start the sensor adjustments and settings
again, see procedure "BRE-002,
"BRE-002, see L
E
procedure "BRE-015,
"BRE-015, see procedure "BPU-015.
"BPU-015. ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BPU-014 Checking the feeder preform count 3
· Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing

preform count is correct.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU015.
12- Remove the preforms.
13- Remove the mask from the sensors (1 ; 2).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
hecking the feeder preform count PU-014 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-015 Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The values below are recommended for testing a new

production set-up. These values can be refined after
studying the performance of the preforms in
production.
1-006030-14-xx.svg

dif fer depending on the 1 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004..
PROCEDURE

Setting the parameters for the unscrambler roller sensor cells
3- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D1" of 1-008464-10-02.svg
the unscrambler rollers to 2 s using the button (3).

4- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D2" of
the unscrambler
unscrambler rollers to 1 s using
us ing the button (4) (option
according to model).
5- Set the leading
leading edges on cellscells "D3 ; D4 " for the
unscrambler rollers at 0,5 s using the keys (5).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
etting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors PU-015 2/2
Setting the parameters for the hopper sensor cells

A 3 7 8 6
(depending on the machine configuration)
6- Set the leading and trailing edges for the hopper cells at
3 s using the keys (6).
7- Set the the leading and trailing edges of the sensor at the
outlet chute to 3 s using the keys (7).

8- Set the leading and the trailing edges for the blockage
sensor on the elevator column to 1 s using the keys (8).
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper (depending on
the machine configuration)
9- Set the leading edges for the sensors on the mini-hopper
to 3 s using the keys (9).
10- Set the trailing edges for the sensors on the mini-hopper 4 5 11 12 10 9
to 1 s using the keys (10).
11- Set the leading edge for the blockage sensor on the 1-007555-03-02.svg
elevator column to 2 s using the key (11).

12- Set the trailing edge for the blockage sensor on the
elevator column to 1 s using the key (12).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

14- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.
"BPU-003.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BPU-017 Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
You search for a start up setpoint when testing a new

production set-up or when the current production set-
up is not satisfactory.
Setpoints can be searched in the Feeder family in

either Automatic and Manual mode. Searching for
setpoints in Manual mode requires in-depth knowledge
of the articles being produced.
Depending on the machine configuration, only one of

1-006030-14-xx.svg
the two screens (A ; B) is visible in the application
PCC. For this procedure, only consider the setpoints
visible on the screens (A) or (B).
Designations
Designations and functions for the relevant sensor cells
D4 D3 D2 D1
Unscrambler rollers and elevator column
D1 B102.1
stoppage
Unscrambler roller regulation sensor
D2 B126.0
(option according to model)
D3 Unscrambler roller exit B102.0
Unscrambler roller anticipated start
D4 B103.3
sensor
1-010560-01-xx.svg
The aim of this procedure is to determine the setpoints A 1 3 11 2

(3 ; 4 ; 5) and the setpoint (6) (if it is present) to obtain
the appropriate level and the flow of preforms in the
unscrambler roller assembly and the infeed rail. the
rapid improvement in th level and flow
fl ow of preforms in the
feeder is principally obtained by modifying:
-
the start setpoint for the elevator column (5)
according to the quantity of preforms dropped into
the unscrambler rollers,
- hopper belt setpoint (3) according to the quantity of
preforms supplying the hopper outlet chute,
- for the configuration
(B), the "Small hopper supply" (6) setpoint (motors
for the elevator column/intermediate conveyor
assembly according to the quantity of preforms
tipped into the mini-hopper.
D F 5 E 4 10 9
1-010420-01-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
earching for preform feeder start-up setpoints PU-017 2/6
Initial values for the start setpoints

B 1 6 3 11 2
The values on the table are the base values. These
values are present in the PCC application during the
first start-up. These values are replaced when the
recipe is loaded.
Element Reference Start setpoint

Hopper belt (3) 50 %
80 %
Unscrambler roller (Steel)
(fixed value)
(4)
Unscrambler 60 %
roller (Aluminium) (fixed value)
Elevator column (5) 60 %
Elevator column* (6) 30 %
* for the configuration (B)
If there is a production process set-up and a rate close

to the new production, it is possible to recover the
values of the setpoints for the corresponding D F 5 E 4 10 9
recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

"BPU-005.
Initial values for the speed increase and decrease 1-008848-07-02.svg
percentages
Elevator column Unscrambler

Setpoint instructions
Window (B) roller Window (C)
With presence at D2 10 % 10 %*
With presence at D3 10 % 10 %
By missing preforms 1% None
With non-presence at D4 15 % * 15 % *
* Accessible only
only in Manual mode
mode
MACHINE STATUS
-
machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001.
"BCU-001.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Grade 00 abrasive paper.
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24

The "Feeder" family appears. C
The (C) window appears. 7
The characteristics of the preforms entered into the
application PCC influence the operation of the preform
feeder :
- If the value entered (7) for the interior diameter of 8
the preform is greater than 38 mm, the speed
setpoint for the elevator column (5) is automatica
automatically
lly
limited to 81 %,
- If the value entered (8) for the total preform length is
less than 100 mm, the speed setpoint for the
elevator column (5) is automatically limited to 85 %.
3- Enter the characteristics of the preforms for the 1-008844-03-02.svg
production to be carried out.

4- Close the window (C).
The preform characteristics for the production are saved.
Monitoring the preform flow time on the unscrambler rollers
This procedure is made easier with the assistance of a

second technician.
machine.
6- Make 2 marks 2 m apart on the unscrambler rollers using
a marker pen.
7- Position a preform in front of the second
s econd mark.
Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (see the
table above) in the "Feeder Test" window , see
procedure "BPU-008.
"BPU-008.
9- Start the unscrambler
unscrambler rollers , see procedure "BPU-008
"BPU-008..
The speed of the preform flow on the unscrambler
rollers is around 2 m in 3 s.
F Check the preform flow time between the 2 marks.
If the flow time is not correct.
· Stop the rrollers
ollers , see procedure "BPU-008
"BPU-008..
· Check the gap between the rollers , see
procedure "BRM-013.
"BRM-013.
· Clean the unscrambler rollers using grade 00
abrasive paper.
If the flow time is incorrect.
10- Stop the rollers , see procedure "BPU-008
"BPU-008..
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
Search the setpoints in the Automatic mode

A 1 3 11 2
using button (9).
(9).
The setpoint value (5) must be entered into the auto-
"BPU-003..
adapt window, see procedure "BPU-003
12- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see
the table above.
13- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage
in the windows (D ; E), see the table above.
The key (10) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+"
selected.
key(s) (10).
15- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.
"BPU-003.
F Wait for the end of the cycle.
F Check that the level and the flow of the preforms in the
preform feeder is appropriate.
16- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease
percentages in the windows (D ; E). D F 5 E 4 10 9
Search the setpoints in Manual mode
1-010420-01-02.svg
"Manual" mode using
using button (9).
(9).
18- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see
the table above.
19- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage
in the windows (D ; E), see the table above.
The key (10) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+"
selected.
key(s) (10).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
The procedure below is described in Manual mode for B 1 6 3 11 2

21- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
A satisfactory flow of preforms in the feeder is
characterized by a fluctuation in the level of preforms
around the "D3" cell without that extending to the "D4"
and "D1" cells.
F Check that the unscrambler rollers and the upstream
components are sufficient
sufficiently
ly supplied w ith preforms.
In the configuration (B), the setpoint (6) represents the

speed percentage for the elevator column and remote
hopper (option)/intermediate conveyor assembly.
F Observe the level and the flow of preforms using the
indicators
indicators ((11)
11) on the sensors
sensors D4 ; D3 ; D1 as well as
the levels measured at the elevator column (F).
If no sensor cells are occluded and if the speed
measured (F) is above the setpoint (5).
Lack of preforms in the unscrambler rollers .
· Increase the setpoint (5). D F 5 E 4 10 9
·
If necessary, increase the setpoints (3) and (6) (if
present). 1-008848-07-02.svg
If the sensor cell "D1" is often occluded and causes

frequent preform feeder stoppages .
Too many preforms in the unscrambler rollers .
· Reduce the setpoint (5).
· If necessary, reduce the setpoints (3) and (6) (if
present).
F Check that the reference value calculat
calculated
ed is below *1.
If yes. 13 12
If not.
· Stop the preform loading using the key (12).
· Stop the preform feeder using the key (13).
1-006704-13-xx.svg
· Select high speed for the elevator column(s)
using the key(s) (10).
· Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform
feeder, see the table above.
22- Continue adjusting the setpoints until you obtain a
satisfactory level and flow of preforms in the feeder.
23- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease
percentages in the windows (D ; E).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-015.
"BCU-015.
The speed setpoints, obtained with this procedure can
be transfered into the other operating mode (automatic
or manual)for the feeder, before saving the recipe.
using button (9).
(9).
L 26- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005
"BPU-005..
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BPU-027 Initializing the preform feeder production start 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is designed to provide instructions for

all of the operations required for preparing the feeder
before starting production.
For all developments and additional training, please

contact SIDEL.
To carry out this procedure you will require the Service

Procedure Catalogue.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-123-xx.svg

"BCU-001,
- hopper cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017.
"BCU-017.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
activated
application
on as
configuration.
ion.

Preliminary
Preliminary settings
1- Set the unscrambler rollers, see procedure "BRM-013.
"BRM-013.
2- Set the stabilization rail assembly, see
procedure "BRM-017.
"BRM-017.
3- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016.
"BRM-016.
4- Set the infeed rail , see procedure "BRM-011
"BRM-011..
5- Check the tensions on the conveyor belts, see
procedure "BRM-015.
"BRM-015.
6- Set the infeed rail sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-014.
"BRE-014.
7- Set the stabilization rail sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-015
"BRE-015..
8- Set the unscrambler rollers sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-016.
"BRE-016.
9- Set the sensors cells on the hopper, see

procedure "BRE-018
"BRE-018..
10- Set the time-delays on the prefrom feeder sensors, see
L
E
procedure "BPU-015.
"BPU-015.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
process
nitializing the preform feeder production start PU-027 2/2
11- Adjust the detection system at the machine infeed, see

procedure "BRE-002.
"BRE-002.
12- Check the count function on the preform feeder, see
procedure "BPU-014.
"BPU-014.
13- Feeder tests, see procedure "BPU-008
"BPU-008..
Setting up the production process

14- Load the preforms for production into the hopper.
15- Search the start setpoints for the preform feeder, see
procedure "BPU-017.
"BPU-017.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BPU-005.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE BNM
Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps ..............................................................................
..............................................................................................................
................................ BNM-001
Inspecting the torque limiters .....................................................
..............................................................................................................
..............................................................
..... BNM-002
Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors ......................................................................................................... BNM-003
Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices ...............................
................................................................
.............................................
............ BNM-004
Checking the misload safety device ......................................................................................................... BNM-005
Checking the machine levels .................................................................................................................... BNM-006
Cleaning the molds prior to storage ...........................................
.............................................................................................
..............................................................
............ BNM-008
Inspection/cleaning: braking system ..........................................
............................................................................................
..............................................................
............ BNM-009
Visual inspection of the reducer motor ..................................................................................................... BNM-011
Checking general synchronization .......................................................................................................
................................................... ........................................................
.... BNM-012
Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder ......................................................................................................... BNM-013
Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels ..........................................................
...........................................................................................
................................. BNM-014
Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam ..............................................
.................................................................................
................................... BNM-015
Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams .......................................
..................................................................................
....................................................
......... BNM-033
Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles ........................................................................................................... BNM-045
Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine) ....................................................................... BNM-046
REMOVAL / REFIT PROCEDURE BDM

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber .....................................................................................
.................................................................................. ... BDM-001
Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" .............................................................................. BDM-002

Removal/refit: transfer arms ..................................................................................................................... BDM-003
Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters .............................................................................................. BDM-005
Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters .........................................
..................................................................................
..................................................
......... BDM-006
Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters ........................................................................................................ BDM-007
Removal/refit: nozzle seals. ...............................................................................................................
...................................................... ..............................................................
..... BDM-008
Removal/refit: spindle chain links ............................................................................................................. BDM-010
Removal/refit: molds and mold bases ...............................................................
......................................................................................................
....................................... BDM-011
Removal/refit: spindle tips ..................................................................................
........................................................................................................................
...................................... BDM-012
Removal/refit: spindle sprockets .....................................................
..........................................................................................................
.........................................................
.... BDM-013
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder .............................................................................................................
.................................................................. ........................................... BDM-014
Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder .............................................................................................................
..................................................... .............................................................
..... BDM-015
Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) ....................
.......................................
............................
......... BDM-016
Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust .............................................................................................. BDM-017
Removal/refit: upstream feed unit ........................................................................................................
.................................................... ........................................................
.... BDM-018
Removal/refit: downstream feed unit ........................................................................................................ BDM-019
Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable .................................................................................................... BDM-020
L
E Removal/refit: infeed guide ....................................................................................................................... BDM-021
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 C - 1/ 4
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part C
Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide ..................................................................................................... BDM-022
Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable .....................................................
..............................................................................................
......................................... BDM-023
Removal/refit: transfer grips .....................................................................................................................
......................................................................... ............................................ BDM-024
Removal/refit: nozzle tip ........................................................................................................................... BDM-025
Removal/refit: stretching rod ..................................................................................................................
......................................................... ...........................................................
.. BDM-026
Removal/refit: stretching cam ................................................................................................................... BDM-027
BDM-027
Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide ............................................................................................................ BDM-02
BDM-028
8
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command) ................................................................ BDM-02

BDM-029
9
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals .................................................................................................... BDM-03
BDM-030
0
Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts ........................................................
.....................................................................................................
............................................. BDM-03
BDM-031
1
Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke) ............................................................................................... BDM-03
BDM-032
2
Removal/refit: braking system friction pads .............................................................................................. BDM-03
BDM-033
3
Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer .................................................................................................... BDM-03
BDM-034
4
Removal/refit: mold base safety pin .........................................................................................................
..................................................................... .................................... BDM-03
BDM-035
5
Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer .................................................................................................. BDM-036
BDM-036
Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs ..................................
.....................................................................
.............................................
.......... BDM-03
BDM-037
7
Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt ............................................................................................ BDM-03
BDM-039
9
Removal/refit: conveyor belts ................................................................................................................... BDM-04
BDM-040
0
Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit ............................................................ BDM-04
BDM-043
3
Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber ..................................
......................................................................
..............................................
.......... BDM-04
BDM-045
5
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel ......................................................................................................... BDM-04
BDM-046
6
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide .......................................................................................
................................................... .................................... BDM-047
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides ............................................................................................... BDM-048
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides ............................................................................................... BDM-049
Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) ................................................. BDM-050
Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve ...............................................
.......................................................................................
........................................ BDM-063
Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber ....................................
.................................................................
............................. BDM-069
Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters ....................................
....................................................
................ BDM-072
Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) ................................................................. BDM-075
Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven ....................................
..............................................................................
.......................................................
............. BDM-076
Reconditioning the oven spindles ............................................................................................................. BDM-095
Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer ................................................................................................ BDM-098
Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve .............................................
..........................................................
............. BDM-106
Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid ......................................
......................................................................
................................ BDM-107
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BRM

Setting the mold opening/closing lever ..................................................................................................... BRM-00
BRM-001
1
Setting the heights of the transfer arms .............................................
...........................................................................................
......................................................
........ BRM-00
BRM-002
2
Setting the tension of the spindle chains .................................................................................................. BRM-003
BRM-003
Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven .................................................................................................... BRM-004
BRM-004
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer ....................................................................................... BRM-00
BRM-005
5
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer ...................................................................................................
.................................................................. ................................. BRM-00
BRM-006
6
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds ................................................................................................ BRM-00
BRM-007
7
Setting the tensions on the timing belts .................................................................................................... BRM-008
BRM-008
Setting the stretching bottom thrust .......................................................................................................... BRM-009
BRM-009
Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields ........................................................................................ BRM-01
BRM-010
0
Setting the infeed rail ................................................................................................................................ BRM-01
BRM-011
1
Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads ................................
................................................................
.........................................
......... BRM-01
BRM-012
2
Setting the unscrambler roller assembly .......................................................
..................................................................................................
........................................... BRM-01
BRM-013
3
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts ............................................................................................... BRM-01
BRM-015
5
Setting the height of the unscrambler unit ................................................................................................ BRM-016
BRM-016
L
Setting up the stabilization rail assembly ............................................
..........................................................................................
.....................................................
....... BRM-01
BRM-017
7 E
ID
S
©
C - 2/ 4 Publication date : 13/11/2009
SBO 20/24
Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer .......................................................................................

.................................................................................... ... BRM-018
Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) ........................................................................ BRM-021
Setting the bottle base outfeed guide ....................................................................................................... BRM-022
Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) ........................................................................
.................................... .................................... BRM-023
Setting the stretching cylinder rollers ...........................................
............................................................................................
............................................................
........... BRM-044
GREASING PROCEDURE BGM

Greasing the transfer arm guides ............................................................................................................. BGM-001
Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps ............................................
...............................................................................
................................... BGM-005
Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-006
Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring ............................................
.................................................................................
..................................... BGM-007
Greasing the stretching guides ..................................................
.........................................................................................................
..............................................................
....... BGM-008
Greasing the mold base support assembly guides ............................................
..................................................................................
...................................... BGM-009
Changing the oil in the reducer motor ...................................................................................................... BGM-010
Greasing the molds (cavities) ................................................................................................................... BGM-011
Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units .................................................................................. BGM-013
Greasing the coder wheel gear ................................................................................................................ BGM-014
Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements ......................................
.............................................................................
................................................
......... BGM-015
Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements ................................................................................
......................................................................................
...... BGM-017
Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings .................................................................................................. BGM-018
Greasing the mold support unit locking system ......................................
..............................................................................
.................................................
......... BGM-019
Greasing the preform ejection cams ........................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................... BGM-020
Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam ...................................................................................................... BGM-021
Transfer cam lubrication ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....... BGM-030
Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units .........................................
................................................
....... BGM-031
Greasing the blowing function cams ........................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................... BGM-032
Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge ...................................................................................... BGM-033
Greasing the reducer motor bearing .............................................................
........................................................................................................
........................................... BGM-035
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Mechanical operation procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps ..............................................................................
..............................................................................................................
................................ BNM-001
Inspecting the torque limiters .....................................................
..............................................................................................................
..............................................................
..... BNM-002
Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors ......................................................................................................... BNM-003
Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices ...............................
................................................................
.............................................
............ BNM-004
Checking the misload safety device ......................................................................................................... BNM-005
Checking the machine levels .................................................................................................................... BNM-006
Cleaning the molds prior to storage ...........................................
.............................................................................................
..............................................................
............ BNM-008
Inspection/cleaning: braking system ..........................................

............................................................................................
..............................................................
............ BNM-009
Visual inspection of the reducer motor ..................................................................................................... BNM-011
Checking general synchronization .......................................................................................................
................................................... ........................................................
.... BNM-012
Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder ......................................................................................................... BNM-013
Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels ..........................................................
...........................................................................................
................................. BNM-014
Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam ..............................................
.................................................................................
................................... BNM-015
Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams .......................................
..................................................................................
....................................................
......... BNM-033
Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles ........................................................................................................... BNM-045
Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine) ....................................................................... BNM-046
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure
1/2 BNM-001 Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always wear clean,

clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
- all machine power and utilities turned off.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 1-006030-09-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
disengaged. 2
Depending on the configuration of your machine, these 1

remain the same.
2- Loosen the handles (1).
1-006075-01-xx.svg
Never use cleaning agents.
4- Clean the lamps (3) using a clean, dry cloth.

5- Replace faulty, blackened or persistently soiled lamps
(3), see procedure "BDE -009.
-009.
8- Repeat steps 1 to 7, to check all of the oven lamps.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006076-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure Part C
nspection/cleaning: oven lamps NM-001 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-002 Inspecting the torque limiters 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For all work on the torque limiters, check the calibration

values on the transmission drawings.
Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.
1-006580-06-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 A
- primary electrical circuit under power,

- main electrical
electrical circuit under power,
power,
- PCC switched on.
PROCEDURE
machine.
Checking the infeed wheel torque limiter
1-006403-17-02.svg
3- Turn the turntable (2) manually.

The torque limiter will trip. 2
The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC,
reset the torque limiter sensor, see
procedure "BRE-010.
"BRE-010.
4- Reset the preform infeed torque limiter, see
procedure "BCU-020.
"BCU-020.
5- Acknowledge
Acknowledge the fault at the PCC. see
procedure "BCU-026.
"BCU-026.
Check the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter
6- Turn the turntable (3) manually.
The torque limiter will trip. 1-007175-03-xx.svg

L procedure "BRE-010.
"BRE-010.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspecting the torque limiters NM-002 2/4
7- Reset the torque limiter, see procedure "BCU -020.

-020.
8- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-026.
"BCU-026.
Checking the reducer motor torque limiter 3

9- Check for the gap X = 1,5 mm between the probe (4) on
the sensor (5) and the control disc (6).
If the gap X is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
sensor, see procedure "BRE-010.
10- Check for the gap Y = 0,5 mm between the probe (4) on
If the gap Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
1-006574-01-xx.svg
11- Press the probe (4) until the sensor (5) is set off.
4
The corresponding
corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC, Y

procedure "BRE-010.
"BRE-010.
12- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC. see
procedure "BCU-026.
"BCU-026.
Checking the oven wheel torque limiter X
6 5
1-007163-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-002 Inspecting the torque limiters 2
13- Check for the gap X = 1,5 mm between the probe (7) on
the sensor (8) and the control disc (9). 8
If the gap X is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
14- Check for the gap Y = 0,5 mm between the probe (7) on
If the gap Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
15- Press the probe (7) until the sensor (8) is set off.
procedure "BRE-010.
"BRE-010.
16- Acknowledg
Acknowledgee the fault at the PCC. see
procedure "BCU-026.
"BCU-026.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears 7
BEFORE YOU FINISH

Y
17- Close the safetyisdoors.

The procedure now complete.
9 X
1-007118-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspecting the torque limiters NM-002 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-003 Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always use recommende

recommended
d tools.
The vented reflectors must always retain their mirror-

effect.
Always wear clean,

clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
Eye protection is obligatory.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
Breathing protection is obligatory.
When handling the reflectors (3) take the following

2
precautions:
- do not split or break them into small pieces,
1
-
avoid creating dust.
If transformed into dust, the reflectors (3) may cause
temporary irritation to the skin, the eyes and respiratory
system. 1-006075-01-xx.svg
The fine coating on the surface of the standard

reflectors must not be damaged in any way.
MACHINE STATUS 3

procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 1-006089-01-xx.svg
None
Consumables
- cleaning agent "NET A02",
- cotton wad.
Specific tools
- soft paintbrush
paintbrush..
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning:
nspection/cleaning: oven reflectors NM-003 2/2

machine. 4

disengaged.
Depending(1)
elements on the
mayconfiguration of your
vary visually but machine, these
their functions
remain the same.
2- Loosen the handles (1). 5
1-006079-01-xx.svg
4- Remove the standard reflectors (3) and the vented
reflectors (4).
F Check the condition of the reflectors (3 ; 4).
5- Clean the dust off the reflectors (3 ; 4) using a soft brush.
6- Clean the vented reflectors (4) using cotton wad dabbed
in cleaning agent "NET A02".
7- Wipe any remaining cleaning agent off the vented
reflectors (4) using a dry cotton wad.
8- Replace any damaged reflectors (3 ; 4).
9- Refit the reflectors (3 ; 4).
F Make sure that the reflector (4) is in the groove on the
support (5).
12- Repeat steps 1 to 11 , to check all of the reflectors (3 ;
4) in the oven.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-004 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices 2
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
-
primary "BCU-001,
procedure electrical ,
"BCU-001 circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-80-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- adhesive tape.
Specific tools
-
10 mm plastic thickness gauge.

PROCEDURE
Checking the safety devices

1 A
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3- Use the JOG system on the mold closing retractable
safety cam (2) to bring the blowing station forward, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
To ensure
must safety,
always keepthe
theperson
controlcarrying
box JOG outwith
the them.
procedure
1-006403-17-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the mold closing and locking safety devices NM-004 2/4
4- Use a screwdriver (3) as a lever on the mold closing

retractable safety cam (2).
The mold closing safety cam is retracted.
The lamp on the detector (4) "B12.3" goes out.
10
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears
on the message band (A) at the PCC.
5- Remove the screwdriver. 2 4
The mold closing retractable safety cam (2)returns to its
original position. 3
6- Acknowledge
Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-023.
"BCU-023.
7- Use the screwdriver as a lever on the mold locking
retractable safety cam (5).
The mold locking retractable safety cam (5) is now
retracted.
1-006080-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the screwdriver.
5 6 3
procedure "BCU-023.
"BCU-023.
Checking the safety detection systems
10- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036
"BCU-036..
11- Use the JOG unit between the 2 transfer wheels to bring
the blowing station (9) around, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
12- Place the (7) thickness
thickne ss gauge 10 mm on the left half-mold
(8) of the open blowing station (9).
13- Affix the gauge (7) using the
the adhesive tape.
1-006082-01-xx.svg
15- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing
station
with the(9)mold
around so that
closing the follower
retractable (10)cam
safety is in(2),
contact
see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014. 7 9
16- Use the manual rotation system
system to bring the blowing
station (9) around so that the follower (11) is in contact
with the mold locking retractable safety counter-cam
(5), see procedure "BCU-014
"BCU-014.. 8
The alarm messages corresponding to the faults appear
17- Advance the blow unit
unit (9) by manual rotation
rotation so that the
mold blocking rolling (11) is no longer in contact with the 11
cam (5).
1-006081-01-xx.svg
18- Acknow
Acknowledge
ledge the faults at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-023.
"BCU-023.
19- Remove the gauge (7).
20- Close the mold support unit manually, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. L
E
21- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036.
"BCU-036. ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-004 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
22- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing

station (9) around to the mold opening/clos
opening/closing
ing safety lever
(12), see procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
23- If the blowing station (9) sets off the safety device (12), 10
adjust the mold opening/closing lever, see
procedure "BRM-001.
"BRM-001.
12
1-006083-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the mold closing and locking safety devices NM-004 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-005 Checking the misload safety device 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-10-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- thickness ring
rin g 1 mm same diameter as the preform neck,
-
1 preforms.
PROCEDURE

1 A
machine.
1-006403-17-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the misload safety device NM-005 2/4
3- Pivot the infeed guide (2) manually.

4- Position the preform (3) on the infeed turntable (4).
5- Bring the preform up to the spindle tip (5) using the JOG
"BCU-013..
6- Position the thickness ring 1 mm(6) on the spindle tip
(5).
4 2
1-006084-01-xx.svg
7- Bring the spindle tip (5) up to the preform loading

point(3) using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The preform (3) will present a fault on loading due to the
thickness of the ring (6).
8- Use the JOG to turn the oven wheel, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
F Check the risi
rising
ng section on the ejection cams (7).
F Chec k the rise of the 3 guide followers (8) on the ejection 5
cams (7).
(7 ).
F Make sure that the mis-loaded preform is ejected.
6
F Check the safety device.
The lamp on the sensor (9)"B32.0" will be off when it is
inactive.
on the message band (A) at the PCC. 3
9- Remove the preform (3) and the ring (6).
F Check the falling section of the ejection cams (7).
procedure "BCU-023.
"BCU-023.
1-006090-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006085-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-005 Checking the misload safety device 2
1-006086-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the misload safety device NM-005 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-006 Checking the machine levels 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is intended to check the levels of the

machine. Levelling up procedures use other means
which take into account

in the production the position
area. SIDEL carriesofout
thethe
blow wheel
levelling
up.
1-006030-54-xx.svg
Check the levels according to the measurments taken

2
during the installaiton of the machine (see SIDEL
levelling up document).
If the document is not available, establish a reference

to be used for the annual inspections.
1
The arrow
which nextbe
it should to read.
the level indicates the direction in
3
MACHINE STATUS 4
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None 1-006517-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
-
precision spirit level 0,02 mm/m.

PROCEDURE
5 6 9 10
1-006825-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the machine levels NM-006 2/2
1- Take the levels of the bars (7) located as follows:

on the left side (1) of the blow wheel,
on the rear cross-piece (2) of the blow wheel.
1-008389-01-xx.svg
2- Take the levels of the bars (8) located as follows:

on the transfer table (3 ; 4),
on the front module (5 ; 6),
on the rear module (9 ; 10).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
if these readings do not match the original levels,

contact SIDEL.
1-006685-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-008 Cleaning the molds prior to storage 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never use oxygenated or chlorinated cleaning agents.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth, 1-006757-01-xx.svg
- bubble-wrap.
Specific tools
- sectionned pallets.
PROCEDURE
1- Clean the centering studs (1) using a clean. dry, non-

abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03". 3 1 3
2- Clean the seal planes (2) on the half-molds and the mold
base using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in 4 4
cleaning agent "NET A03".
3- Clean the preform centering ring (3) using a clean, dry
non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03".
4- Clean the cavity (4) in the half-molds and the mold base 1 1
using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning
agent "NET A03".
2 2
5- Wrap the mold and the mold base in bubble-wrap.
6- Store the molds on sectionned pallets.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

4
7- Make sure there is no chlorine in the storage area.
8- Monitor the humidity level in the storage area (less than
70%). 2
9- Monitor the temperature in the storage area (from 20°C

1-006091-01-xx.svg
to 25°C).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
leaning the molds prior to storage NM-008 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-009 Inspection/cleaning: braking system 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The braking system opens pneumatically and is drawn

closed by a vacuum (see User manual).
Never loosen the bolts (1).
Operations 8 to 10 require the presence of 2

technicians.
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems.

1-006030-17-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see 2
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 3
"BCU-005..
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables 1-006094-01-xx.svg

- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- set of thickness gauges .
PROCEDURE
Wear latex gloves.
Do not apply cleaning agents to the brake pads (2).

machine.
2- Clean the accessible sections of the brake disc (3) using
a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04".
3- Use the JOG to make the other sections of the brake disc
(3) accessible, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
4- Clean the other sections of the
t he brake disc (3) using a cloth
F
dipped
Chec in cleaning
k the conditionagent
of all "NET
of the A04".
parts of the brake system
visually.
F Check the condition of the brake pads (2) visuall
visually.
y.
L · Replace the pads if they have become soiled by
E
D
I
S
-033..
grease or oil, see procedure "BDM -033
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning:
nspection/cleaning: braking system NM-009 2/2
F Check the thickness of the brake pads (2).

· If the thickness of the brake pads (2) is less than 7
mm replace them, see procedure "BDM -033.-033.
5- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC.
6- Turn off the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013
-013..
7- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.
"BSU-003.
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 6
2 technicians is required for the following operations.
8- The first technician presses the button (6) and keeps it
pressed in.
The braking system is now open.
Never touch the moving parts of the brake during this
inspection.
9- The second technician checks the gap 0,5 +0,1/0 mm
between the brake pads (2) and the brake disc (3).
1-006603-01-xx.svg
Check the gap X along the entire length of the brake 2

pads (2).
10- Adjust the brake pads (2) if the measurements
measurements taken
exceed tolerance limits or are irregular, see 3
procedure "BRM -012.
-012.
After inspecting the brake pads (2) the second
technician gives a signal to the first to release the button
(6).
11- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.
"BSU-003.
1-006093-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
F Chec k the condition of all of the parts of the brake system
visually.
F Check the tightness of the fixing bolts (7) (tightened to a
torque of 85 N.m.
12- Press the button (6) several times to make sure that the
brake is working properly.
7
1-006096-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-011 Visual inspection of the reducer motor 2
MACHINE STATUS
- reducer motor cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Check the general condition of the reducer motor (1).
3- Make sure there are no traces of oil on the reducer motor 1-006030-17-xx.svg
(1) shafts or the floor.
If you detect any oil carry out a closer inspection, see
procedure "BGM -010.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006099-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
isual inspection of the reducer motor NM-011 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-012 Checking general synchronization 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Determine the cause of the de-synchronization before

attemptng any work.
Check the synchronization

synchronizatio n of the machine after carrying
out any mechanical procedure on the belts, pulleys or
bearings.
Checking synchronization requires the full attention of

the technician with regard to the mechanical parts
involved as well as full control of the JOG system, see
1-006580-05-xx.svg
procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
Grips not opening symmetrically, marks around the

preform necks or problems on transfer can all be the
result of de-synchronization.
de-synchronization.
MACHINE STATUS
- correct belt tensions, see procedure "BRM -008
-008,, 2
- torque limiters in working position.

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- 3 preforms,
- 3 certified
certified acceptable
acceptable items
items .
PROCEDURE

machine.
3- Position 3 preforms on the infeed turntable (2).
4- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
5- Make sure that the preforms load onto the spindle chain
correctly.
L 6- Remove the preforms.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking general synchronization NM-012 2/4
7- Place 3 preforms at the oven outfeed, up-line from the off-

off -
load point.
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Checking the meeting points of the grips with the molds
is difficult and of limited efficiency when the machine is
moving. For a full inspection, see
procedure "BRM-006,
"BRM-006, see procedure "BRM-007
"BRM-007..
F Make sure that
t hat the preforms move
mov e freely right up to the
bottle transfer wheel.
F Check all aspects
as pects of preform movement
mov ement as well as that of
the parts around them.
9- Note any abnormal
abnormal stress or asymmetry
asymmetry on preform
transfer.
Preform movement and transfer should be fluid and
unobstructed.
10- Remove the preforms from the grips on the bottle transfer
wheel.
11- Place 3 bottles in the transfer grips (3) on the bottle
transfer wheel. 4 3
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
F Check that the bottles are carried correctly to the neck
guides (4).
F Make sure that the bottles and all moving parts around
them are working properly.
13- Remove the bottles from the neck guides (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006581-02-xx.svg
De-synchrnonization at one meeting point often

indicates de-synchronization at another meeting point.
If synchronization problems are found at any 1 point,

check all of the transfer points.
14- If necessary, re-synchronize the various parts in the A
following order. D
De-synchronization at meeting point A?
B
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds, see
procedure "BRM-007.
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, see
procedure "BRM-005.
Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven, see
procedure "BRM-004. E C
De-synchronization at meet
De-synchronization meetiing point B?
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, see 1-006690-01-xx.svg
procedure "BRM-005. L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-012 Checking general synchronization 3

procedure "BRM-004.
De-synchronization at meeting point C?
procedure "BRM-004.
De-synchronization at meeting point D?
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer, see
procedure "BRM-006.
Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer, see
procedure "BRM-018.
De-synchronization at meeting point E?
Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer, see
procedure "BRM-018.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking general synchronization NM-012 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-013 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never use objects which may damage the parts that

need to be cleaned.
Discard any preforms that fall from the production line

or that have been handled.
Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning.
Certain operations described in this chapter refer to

optional equipment. 1-007021-11-xx.svg
Parts to be cleaned :
Hopper and elevator column
- the hopper (1),
14
- the conveyor belt (2) and the fall cushioner (3) for the
hopper (1),
- the ribbed belt (4), the flaps (5) and the upper cover of the
elevator column (6).
Intermediate conveyor (option)
- the internal walls of the intermediate conveyor ,
- the conveyor belt of the intermediate conveyor . 13
Mini-hopper (option according to model)
- the internal walls of the mini hopper (7),
- the ribbed belt (8), the flaps (9) and the upper cover of the
elevator column (10),
- the conveyor belt (11) of the intermediary belt (12).
1-006110-03-xx.svg
Unscrambler roller assembly

16
- the preform recovery conveyor belt (13),
- the rollers, the wire-guides (14) and the rails (15) on the
unscrambler roller assembly,
- the 45° unscrambler paddles (16),
- the waste recovery area (17), 15
- the flaps,
- the internal walls of the unscrambler roller assembly,
- the access gantry.
1-006105-03-xx.svg
Infeed rail
- the infeed rail cowling (option),
- all the guides.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning: preform feeder NM-013 2/4
MACHINE STATUS
- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017,
"BCU-017,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 3
None
Consumables
- cleaning agent "NET A03". 2
Specific tools
1-006485-02-xx.svg
- long-necked industrial vacuum cleaner (check the filters
of the vacuum cleaner),
- long-handled rubber scraper,
- raised platform for workng at heights,
- ladder and footplate supplied with the machine.
PROCEDURE
1- Remove any preforms present on the surfaces.

2- Remove all dust and plastic debris using the vacuum
cleaner.
3- Clean the parts using a clean cloth and cleaning agent
"NET A03".
· If required. wipe the parts down.
Cleaning the hopper (1) and the hopper fall cushioner (3)
The machine ladder is designed to be fitted to the edge 6 1

of the hopper.
4- Clean the hopper (1) and the fall cushioner (3) using the
rubber scraper, a cloth and "NET A03" cleaner.
Cleaning the conveyor belts (2 ; 4 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13 ; 15)
This procedure describes the simple cleaning of the

conveyor belts. For more complete cleaning, remove
4
the belts and clean them in a bath or with a jet of
water, see procedure "BDM-040.
"BDM-040.
5
5- Open or remove the casings providing access to the
conveyor belts.
1-008538-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-013 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder 1
6- Clean all accessible sections of the conveyor belts.

17
7- Clean all sections of the conveyor belts by physically
pulling them along.
8- Close or install the casings.
Cleaning the waste recovery area (17)
9- Open the gate (23).
10- Clean the recovery area (17).
11- Close the gate (23). 23
1-008526-01-xx.svg
Cleaning the anti-UV cabin (UV rail option)

8
12- Open the bottom cover (18) using the butterfly nut (19).
10
13- Remove the top cover (20).
14- Remove the rear panel (21) by releasing the 1/4 turn
fixings .
15- Remove the side panel (22) by releasing the 1/4 turn 9 7
fixings .
Never obstruct the upper ventilation grill as this may
reduce the bactericidal effects of the lamps.
12
Never clean the UV lamps .
11
1-006675-06-xx.svg
If a lamp is broken, clean the whole area thoroughly with

an aspirator. Dispose of any articles present and make
sure any electrical components are disposed of
according to specific procedures.
16- Clean the internal walls, the rear panel (21) and the side
panel (22).
17- Clean all of the parts oin the infeed rail and the upstream
block .
18- Refit the top cover (20).
19- Refit the rear panel (21) and secure it using the 1/4 turn
fixings .
20- Refit the side panel (22) and secure it using the 1/4 turn
19 18 21
fixings .
21- Close and lock the lower cover (18) using the butterfly nut 1-006807-03-xx.svg
(19).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning: preform feeder NM-013 4/4
General checks
22 20
F Check all of the rubber and plasti
plastic
c parts to make sure they
are free from:
stretching or shrinking,
hardening or softening,
cracking, porosity or roughness.
22- Replace faulty or damaged parts.
F Check that all of the nuts and fixtures are tightened up
properly.
F Control the adjustment of the conveyor belts, se e
procedure BRM-015.
BRM-015 .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The procedure is now complete. 1-006808-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BNM-014 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never start the machine without lubrication on the

toothing of the drive rings.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 1-006030-12-xx.svg

"BCU-004,,
- PCC application set
set to "Settings",
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths.
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
Degreasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring (1)

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BSU-003.
3- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
4- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (1) using a brush
dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04".
5- Clean the drive gear. 1
6- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003
"BSU-003..
7- Make accessible the other parts of the r ing (1) using the
JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
8- Repeat the previous steps, from
from step 2 , until degreasing
degreasing 1-006088-01-xx.svg
is complete on the teeth of the drive ring (1).

9- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (1), see
procedure "BGM-007.
"BGM-007.
Degreasing the toothing on the oven drive ring (3)
Degreasing the toothing on the oven drive ring (3)
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
egreasing the toothing on the drive wheels NM-014 2/4

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BSU-003.
Depending on the type of machine and accessibility,
remove the elements (4 ; 5) or (5 ; 6 ; 7).
1-008402-01-xx.svg
12- Clean the different disassembled parts using a cloth

moistened with "NET A04" cleaner.
6 7
1-008423-01-xx.svg
13- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (3) using a
clean, dry cloth.
14- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (3) using a brush
dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04". 5
6
1-008401-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BNM-014 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels 2
15- Clean the drive gear.

"BSU-003..
17- Make accessible the other parts of the ring (3) using the
JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
18- Repeat the previous steps, from step 11 , until
degreasing is complete on the teeth of the drive ring (3).
19- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (3), see
procedure "BGM-006.
"BGM-006.
20- Install the different elements that have been removed.
3
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
1-006087-04-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
egreasing the toothing on the drive wheels NM-014 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-015 Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sensor
2 Stretching cam safety B14.4
When the safety device is set off a critical alarm will be

generated and the fault will be shown on the PCC
display.
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment

fitted on the machine and always follow current safety
regulations.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002
"BCU-002,,
- PCC switched onsee
onsee procedure "BCU-004.
"BCU-004. 1
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Press on the retractable cam sector (1) for the stretching
safety cam.
The cam sector (1) retracts.
The lamp on the sensor "B14.4"(2) will be off when it is
1-006667-01-xx.svg
inactive.
3- Release the pressure on the retractable cam sector (1).
The sensor lamp "B14.4" (2) is lit when the sensor is A
active.
4- Acknowledge
Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-026
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L 1-006403-04-02.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the safety devices on the stretching cam NM-015 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-033 Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Parts to be cleaned:
- loading/off-loading cams (1).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 1-006030-93-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BSU-003.
Do not remove grease from the cam races (1) and the
followers in contact with them.
3- Remove excess and splashed grease from the parts (1)
and the areas around them using clean dry cloths.
1
Area greased automatically
1-006378-03-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
leaning of the loading and unloading cams NM-033 2/2
4- If necessary, clean the greaser applicator (3).

F Check for any grease leaks at the inlet connector (4)
(4)..
"BSU-003.
6- Use the JOG system to access the other parts (1) of the 3
"BCU-013..
7- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have cleaned off
all the excess and splashed grease.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
In order to be able to start the machine normally, ther 4

must be sufficient grease on the cam races (1) and the
followers in contact.
"BCU-013.
1-008401-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-045 Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Visually identifying the type of spindles :

- Spindle (A), shaft and cylindrical support ring.
-
Spindle (B), shaft and flattened support ring.
The maintenance schedule varies according to the type
of spindle.
Type Frequency
Spindle (A) 2 000 h
Spindle (B) 3 000 h 1-006030-21-xx.svg
Parts to be cleaned:
- spindle chain assembly.
Never use solvents as they may affect the lubrication of

the bearings and the self-lubricating bushings.
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
A B
1-010327-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- PCC application
application set to "Settings",
"Settings",
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-residual).
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Wipe off any excess or splashed grease from around the
spindle chain using a clean, dry cloth.
L
E
D
I
3- Remove the ejectors (1) manually.
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning: oven spindles NM-045 2/2
4- Clean the parts of the spindle chain using a clean, dry

cloth. 2
Only use alcohol at 70 % and no other cleaning product

as this may damage the parts.
5- Disinfect the spindle tips (2) and the ejectors (1) using a
cloth dipped in 70 % alcohol.
6- Clip the ejectors (1).
7- Use the JOG system to access the other parts of the
spindle chain . 1
8- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have fully cleaned
the spindle chain.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
1-010317-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNM-046 Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine) 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Grease distributor, mold opening/closing cam and mold

1
raise/lower cam
If the damage cannot be repaired replace the faulty

distributer with an identical one. Check the references 1
of the distributers
distributer s in order not to confuse them with other
distributers fitted around the machine.
1-006030-121-xx.svg
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

29" grease corresponds
corresponds to 1 shot from 4
the "ALGI" grease gun.
MACHINE STATUS 2

"BCU-001. 3
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables 5
- "LUB 29" grease,
1
Specific tools 1-010376-01-xx.svg
- "ALGI" grease gun.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- If need be, remove the electrical unit, see
procedure "BCU-036.
"BCU-036.
3- Clean the distributer (1) and the area around it using a
clean, dry cloth.
F Check that all of the parts greased manually using the
distributor (1) are sufficiently greased.
gr eased.
If yes.
· Go to step 11 .
If not.
F Inspect the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the grease lines.
· If any of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) has been pinched or
split, replace it.
· If none of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) are crushed or
pierced, replace the distributor (1).
Note the positions of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the
distributor (1) in order to correctly refit them.
L
E Fill up the new pipe with grease before connecting it.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine) NM-046 2/2
Fill the new distributer

distributer with
with grease
grease before fitting it.
4- Wipe off any excess grease from the main distributer (1)
using clean, dry cloths.
F Check that all of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the greasing
line are connected.
"BCU-006..
7- Inject 6 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (6) using
8- Clean the greasing nipple (6) using a clean, dry cloth.
6
9- Stop the machine after several wheel revolutions, see
procedure "BCU-006.
"BCU-006.
machine.
F Check that all of the parts greased manually using the
distributor (1) are sufficiently greased.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-008331-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber .....................................................................................
.................................................................................. ... BDM-001
Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" .............................................................................. BDM-002
Removal/refit: transfer arms ..................................................................................................................... BDM-003
Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters .............................................................................................. BDM-005
Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters .........................................
..................................................................................
..................................................
......... BDM-006
Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters ........................................................................................................ BDM-007
Removal/refit: nozzle seals. ...............................................................................................................
...................................................... ..............................................................
..... BDM-008
Removal/refit: spindle chain links ............................................................................................................. BDM-010
Removal/refit: molds and mold bases ...............................................................
......................................................................................................
....................................... BDM-011
Removal/refit: spindle tips ..................................................................................
........................................................................................................................
...................................... BDM-012
Removal/refit: spindle sprockets .....................................................
..........................................................................................................
.........................................................
.... BDM-013
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder .............................................................................................................
.................................................................. ........................................... BDM-014
Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder .............................................................................................................
..................................................... .............................................................
..... BDM-015
Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) ....................
.......................................
............................
......... BDM-016
Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust .............................................................................................. BDM-017
Removal/refit: upstream feed unit ........................................................................................................
.................................................... ........................................................
.... BDM-018
Removal/refit: downstream feed unit ........................................................................................................ BDM-019
Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable .................................................................................................... BDM-020
Removal/refit: infeed guide ....................................................................................................................... BDM-021
Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide ..................................................................................................... BDM-022
Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable ............................................................

..............................................................................................
.................................. BDM-023
Removal/refit: transfer grips ..................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
................................... BDM-024
Removal/refit: nozzle tip ........................................................................................................................... BDM-025
Removal/refit: stretching rod ......................................................
...............................................................................................................
..............................................................
..... BDM-026
Removal/refit: stretching cam ................................................................................................................... BDM-027
Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide ............................................................................................................ BDM-028
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command) ................................................................ BDM-029
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals .................................................................................................... BDM-030
Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts .....................................................................................................
............................................................... ...................................... BDM-031
Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke) ............................................................................................... BDM-032
Removal/refit: braking system friction pads .............................................................................................. BDM-033
Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer .................................................................................................... BDM-034
Removal/refit: mold base safety pin .........................................................................................................
................................................................ ......................................... BDM-035
Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer .................................................................................................. BDM-036
Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs ................................
...................................................................
...............................................
............ BDM-037
Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt ............................................................................................
........................................................................................ .... BDM-039
Removal/refit: conveyor belts ................................................................................................................... BDM-040
L Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit ............................................................ BDM-043
E
D
I Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber ................................
...................................................................
................................................
............. BDM-045
S
©
SBO 20/24
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel ......................................................................................................... BDM-046
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide .......................................................................................
................................................... .................................... BDM-047
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides ............................................................................................... BDM-048
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides ............................................................................................... BDM-049
Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) ................................................. BDM-050
Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve ...............................................
.......................................................................................
........................................ BDM-063
Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber ....................................
.................................................................
............................. BDM-069
Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters ....................................
....................................................
................ BDM-072
Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) ................................................................. BDM-075
Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven ....................................
..............................................................................
.......................................................
............. BDM-076
Reconditioning the oven spindles ............................................................................................................. BDM-095
Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer ................................................................................................ BDM-098
Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve .............................................
..........................................................
............. BDM-106
Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid ......................................
......................................................................
................................ BDM-107
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure
1/4 BDM-001 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock

absorber. Check the references on the absorbers so as
not to confuse them with other absorbers on the
machine.
Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the

open position before attempting any work on it, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
Machine isolated except for: 3
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 2
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 7
- "BCU-004,,
1
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
- Shock absorber (1).

7 4 5 6 1
Consumables
None
Specific tools
-
locking system holding brace (2),
- tool for adjusting the shock absorbers,
- 44,00 x 32 thin flat-head wrench.
PROCEDURE
Removal

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see 1-010178-02-xx.svg
procedure "BSU-001
"BSU-001..
Place the holding brace (2) on the right mold support
unit support block (3), facing the lock, see
L procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure Part C
emoval/refit: mold support unit shock absorber DM-001 2/4
4- Remove the nut (4).

5- Remove the washer (5).
6- Remove the protective cover (7).
7- Loosen the nut (6).
8- Remove the shock absorber (1).

Refit
9- Remove the locking system holding brace (2), see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
11- Screw in the shock absorber (1) fully into the right support
block (3) on the mold support unit.
Adjustments without the tooling (8) :
F Check the type of shock absorber (1) on the rear part
(A).
Is it a "ENIDINE" type shock absorbe
absorberr (1)?
· Screw in the shock absorber (1) to obtain the 9 X 1
distance X=15,2 ±0,2 mm between the body of
1-008051-02-xx.svg
the absorber (1) and the thrust (9).
Is it a "SANA 001" type shock absorber (1)?
9 3
· Screw in the shock absorber (1) to obtain the
distance X=11,7 +0/-0,4 mm between the body of
the absorber (1) and the thrust (9).
12- Go to step 15 .
Adjustments with the tooling (8) :
1
1-006052-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-001 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber 2
F Check that the dimension of the tooling corresponds to

the value X of the type of shock absorber (1) being set
up.
13- Position the shock absorber adjustmen tooling (8).
F Check that the bore on the absorber adjustment tooling
tooling
(8) is able to receive the absorber rod (1) when screwed
in.
14- Screw in the shock absorber (1) right
rig ht up to the adjustment
tooling (8).
F Check that the sho ck absorber adjustment tooling (8) is
straight, and fully flush with the mold support unit and the
absorber body (1).
15- Fit the nut (6) and tighten.
16- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
Place the holding brace (2) on the right mold support
unit support block (3), facing the lock, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. 8 6 1
17- Remove the shock absorber adjustmnt tooling (8). 1-010179-02-xx.svg
18- Position the protective over (7).

19- Position the washer (5).
20- Tighten the nut (4).
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.

"BCU-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: mold support unit shock absorber DM-001 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-002 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly TORNADO 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
During the warranty period only the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly may be replaced.
The stretching rod and the process air both pass

through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the
nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve
assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources
of both biological and chemical contamination.
Do not remove the nozzle cylinder.

1-006030-01-xx.svg
Follow the hygiene precautions. 10 9 2
Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the

8 8
"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle
cylinder.
4
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 5
15
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 12
- "BCU-004,,
PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004 3

- low pressure air circuit open, see proced
procedure
ure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
1 11
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
1-006449-01-xx.svg
Parts
-
solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on base.

Consumables
Specific tools
- torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m.
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU
-013..
-013
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
Turn off the power and utility supplies to the
machine, see procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
3- Remove the stretching
stretchin g rod , see procedure "BDM -026
-026..
4- Block the orifice (1).
L 5- Disconnect the hose (2).
E
D
I 6- Disconnect the hose (3).
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: solenoid valve assembly
assembly TORNADO DM-002 2/4
7- Disconnect the hose (4).

9- Disconnect the hose (6) (from the mold support unit).
10- Remove the bolts (7).
11- Remove the electrical connectors (8). 7

12- Remove the electrical connector (9) from the sensor
(10).
13- Remove the 4 fixing bolts (11).
14- Remove the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12).
Refit
17- Connect the hose (6) to the "TORNADO" solenoid valve
6
assembly (12).
18- Unplug the orifice (13).
19- Clean and check the seals (14 ; 15).
· If the seal (14) is worn replace it, see procedure "BDM
-032..
-032
· If the seal (15) is worn replace it, see procedure "BDM
-032..
-032 1-006450-01-xx.svg
20- Use a clean dry cloth to clean the "TORNADO" solenoid

valve assembly (12).
21- Clean the nozzle cylinder (16) using a clean dry cloth.
22- Position the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12) 13
on the nozzle cylinder (16).
23- First tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a 14 16
torque of 10 N.m.
24- Second tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a
torque of 20 N.m.
25- Reconnect the electrical connector (9) to the sensor 1-006058-02-xx.svg
(10).
Always follow the references

references when connecting the
electrical connectors (8) to the corresponding solenoid
valve functions.
The electrical connector references

referenc es (8) commence with:
- "PB" for the preblow solenoid.
- "E" for the exhaust solenoid.
- "B" for the blowing solenoid.
- "R" for the recovery solenoid valve.
Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors

(8).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-002 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly TORNADO 2
26- Fit the electrical connectors (8).

27- Tighten the bolts (7).
28- Reconnect the hose (5).
30- Reconnect the hose (3). 6 12

32- Reconnect the hose (6) to the mold support unit.
33- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM -026.
-026.
"BCU-013.
1-006059-02-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
35- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (12) and the nozzle
"BPU-006..
cylinder (16), see procedure "BPU-006
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: solenoid valve assembly
assembly TORNADO DM-002 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-003 Removal/refit: transfer arms 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The procedures for removing and replacing preform

and bottle transfer arms are identical.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 1-006030-02-xx.svg

"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- transfer arm removal/refit tool
tool (1).
PROCEDURE
Removal
3;4
machine.
2- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036.
"BCU-036.
3- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position
7
using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Follow the assembly direction indicated on the tooling
(1).
4- Pull the grip supports (2) and position the tooling (1).
5- Remove the bolts (3) and the washers (4).
6- Remove the transfer arms (5).
7- Remove the wrench (1).
Refit
5
2
1-010330-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: transfer arms DM-003 2/2
8- Pull the grip supports (2) and position the tooling (1).
3;4 3;4
9- Position the transfer arm (5).
10- Position the washers (4).
12- Remove the wrench (1).

F Check the height of the transfer arm (5), se e
procedure BRM-002.
BRM-002 .
· If necesssary, set the height of the transfer arm
(5), see procedure "BRM-002.
"BRM-002.
F Check the positi
positions
ons of the foll
followers
owers (6) on the cams (7).
1
· If necessary, set the positions of the rollers (6), see
procedure "BDM-038.
2
"BCU-036.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
15- Close the safety doors. 6 5 6
1-010318-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-005 Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter 40 µm(1),
- filter 5 µm(2), .
- filter 0,01 µm (only when the preform ionisation options is
fitted on the 3M UV rail and the infeed rail).

- vaseline,
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- strap wrench.
PROCEDURE
Removal
3
machine.
F Check that the valve (3) is closed and locked off.

circuit. 4
2- Depress the locking lug (12) and keep it pressed in.
5
11
1-006067-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit:low
emoval/refit:low pressure air circuit filters DM-005 2/4
3- Turn the bowl (5) by a 1/4 and remove it.

4- Repeat steps 2 to 3 to remove the second bowl (5).
12 9
1-006066-01-xx.svg
5- Unscrew and remove the support (6).

6- Remove the filter 40 µm(1).
7- Loosen and remove the filter 5 µm(2).
Refit 9
8- Clean the support (6) using a clean, dry cloth.

8
6 2
1-006064-01-xx.svg
9- Clean the seal (7) and inspect it.

· If the seal (7) is worn replace it.
10- Clean the bases (8 ; 9).
11- Clean the bowls (5). 6
12- Clean and check the seals (10).
· If the seals (10) are worn, replace them. 7 1
13- Position the filter 40 µm(1).

14- Tighten the support (6).
15- Fit the filter 5 µm(2).
1-006065-01-xx.svg
16- Refit the bowls (5).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-005 Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters 2
17- Loosen the connectors (11) as far as possible.

10
BEFORE YOU FINISH
18- Release the valve (3).
19- Open thepressure

The low valve (3).
air circuit is now turned on.
circuit.
F Make sure that the circuit is airtight.
5
1-006022-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit:low
emoval/refit:low pressure air circuit filters DM-005 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-006 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replacement of a high pressure air circuit filter implies

replacing all of the machine's high pressure air circuit
filters.
Danger - high pressure.
The procedure for removing and replacing the high

pressure air circuit filters is identical to that for the 2
filters on the 2 filtration lines.
1-006030-04-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 14 4

procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter (1) ,
- O-ring (2).
Consumables
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- filter wrench (3).
PROCEDURE
Main supply interface panel filter

Removal
machine.
2- Close the valve (4). 9 6 7 5
The high pressure air system is now isolated.
F Wait until the circuit has been completely purged. 1-007859-01-xx.svg

(5 ; 14).
3- Lock out the valve (4).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: high pressure air circuit filters DM-006 2/4
4- Loosen the connector (6).

5- Remove the automatic purge (7).
6- Loosen the flow valve (8) but do not remove it.
7- Remove the bowl (9) using the filter wrench (3). 8

9- Remove the collar (11). 9
10- Remove the filter (1) .

3
1-006321-01-xx.svg
11- Remove the seal (2).

Refit
12- Clean the base (12) using a clean, dry cloth.
12
13- Clean the bowl (9) using a clean, dry cloth.
14- Position the seal (2).
Always wear clean,
clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
Hold the filter by its edges (1) .

1
Never touch the filtering section of the filter unit (1) .
10 11
1-006322-01-xx.svg
15- Partly remove the packaging from the upper part of the
9 2
filter (1) .
Do not remove the packaging from the filter body (1) .
F Check the conditi

condition
on and the position of the seal (13).
16- Position the filter (1) .
17- Position the collar (11).
19- Remove all of the packaging.
20- Lightly tighten the bowl (9) using the filter wrench (3).
21- Tighten up the screw (8).
22- Position the automatic purge (7).
1-006323-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-006 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters 2
23- Tighten the connector (6).

Air recycling system filter 13
Removal
24- Bring the filter (A) round to your working position using
the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
machine, see procedure "BCU-012
"BCU-012..
25- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the 1
machine.
F Check that the valve (4) is closed and padlocked.
(5 ; 14).
26- Loosen and remove the envelope (15) by inserting the pin
wrench into the slot (16).
1-006324-01-xx.svg
27- Remove the O-ring (17).
28- Loosen the filter element (18) from the filter
fil ter block (19) and
remove.
Refit
19 A
29- Clean the envelope (15) using a clean dry cloth.
30- Clean the filter block (19) using the clean dry cloth.
Always wear clean,
clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
Handle the filter element (18) by its edges.
Never touch the filter section of the filter element (18).
Check the reference of the filter element to ensure you

do not confuse it with other filter elements fitted on the
18
machine.
31- Partly remove the wrapping from the threaded section of 1-007396-03-xx.svg
the filter element (18).
Do not remove the packaging from the body of the filter 21 20
element (18).
F Check the condition and the positi
position
on of the 2 seals (20).
32- Grease the thread (21) on the (18) filter and the seals
(20) using vaseline.
Do not apply grease to the filter section of the filter
element (18).
33- Position the filter element (18). 18
34- Tighten up the filter element (18).

1-007395-03-xx.svg
35- Remove all of the packaging.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: high pressure air circuit filters DM-006 4/4
36- Position the O-ring (17).

17 22
37- Lightly grease the thread (22) on the envelope (15).
38- Position the envelope (15).
39- Tighten the envelope (15) using the pin wrench inserted
in the slot (16).

BEFORE YOU FINISH
40- Unpadlock the valve (4).

The high pressure air circuit is now turned on.
circuit. 15 16
F Make sure that the circuit is airtight.
42- Press the "TEST" key on the automatic purge (7). 1-007397-03-xx.svg
F Check that the automatic purge functions correctly (7).

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BDM-007 Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

"Hydraulic system", in the User manual.

equipment..

1-006030-66-xx.svg
The external hydraulic module is supplied with water or

oil depending on the process.
The removal/refit procedure for the filters of an external

hydraulic module is the same for every filter.
The hydraulic interface contains little water.
Intervention on hot hydraulic circuits :

Replacement of a filter on an external hydraulic module may
be done while the machine is in production. In these cases
always follow the following safety instructions:
Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face.

and pressure.
MACHINE STATUS
- thermoregulator - cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter(s) .
Consumables
Specific tools
-
Clean, dry brush,
- nylon brush,
- large tank.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: hydraulic circuit filters DM-007 2/6
PROCEDURE
Removal/refit of a filter on an external hydraulic module

Removal

If the machine is in production, verify that the valve (1)
of the filtration line in use is open.
2- Close the valve (1) of the filter to be replaced.
2
Wait for the maximum temperature drop of the isolated
filtration line befor intervening.
3- Remove the insulating cover (2).
4- Place the tank under the drain plug (3).
5- Remove the drain plug (3). 1
6- Remove the plug (4).
1-007969-04-xx.svg
F Wait until all the fluid has drained out.
7- Remove the 4 bolts (5).
If the filter (7) is over saturated, check the quality of the
fluid and of the upstream circuit.
F Check the condition of the filter (7).
5
· If the filter (7) is dirty, clean it.
·
If the filter
replace it. (7) is deteriorated or over-saturated,
Refit
10- Clean the filter block (8) using a nylon brush, cleaning 4
fluid "NET A04" and a clean, dry cloth.
11- Clean the stoppers (4 ; 6) using a clean, dry cloth.
1-007970-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
12- Clean and check the seals (9 ; 10).

· If the seals (9 ; 10) are worn, replace them.
13- Place the filter (7) on the plug cap (6).
14- Place the plug cap (6)/filter (7) assembly in/on the filter 9
block (8).
1-007971-01-xx.svg
Cross-tighten
Cross-tighten the screws (5).
15- Hand-tighten the screws (5).

16- Hand-tighten the plug (4).
8
17- If necessary, clean the assembly using
usi ng a clean, dry cloth.
18- Install the insulating cover .
19- Fit the drain plug (3).
20- Close the external hydraulic module doors. 10

Dispose of the contents of the tank in accordance with
applicable legislation.
Removal/refitting of the hydraulic panel
Removal/refitting panel filters ( Mold support 7
unit )
1-007972-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Removal
machine.
22- Close the valves (11).
11
23- Position the tank under the filter blocks (12).
24- Remove the stoppers (13).
25- Wait until the water has completely drained out.
26- Remove the filters (14).
If the filters (14) are over-saturated check the quaity of
the water in the upstream circuits.
F Check the condition of the filters (14).
· If the filters (14) are dirty, clean them.
· If the filters (14) are worn or over-saturated, replace 12
them.
Refit
27- Clean the filters (12) using
usi ng water, a brush and a clean, dry
cloth.
28- Clean the stoppers (13) using a clean, dry cloth. 13
1-007351-06-xx.svg
29- Clean and check the seals (15).

· If the seals (15) are worn, replace them.
30- Position the filters (14)
(14) in the stoppers
stoppers (13).
31- Position the stopper
stopper (13)
(13) / filter (14)
(14) assemblies in the 13
filter blocks (12).
15
1-006328-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
32- Lightly tighten the stoppers (13).

33- Wipe down the hydraulic interface using a clean, dry
cloth.
34- Open the valves (11). 12

14
13
1-006327-02-xx.svg
Removal/refit of
of the hydraulic
hydraulic panel filter ( oven )
Removal
machine.
36- Close the valves (16).
37- Place the tank under the filter block (17).
F Wait until the water has completely drained out.
17
16
1-007485-03-xx.svg
If the filter (19) is over saturated, check the quality of

the fluid and of the upstream circuit.
F Check the condition of the filter (19).
· If the filter (19) is dirty, clean it.
· If the filter (19) is deteriorated or over-saturated,
replace it.
Refit
40- Clean the filter block (17) using the clean dry cloth.
41- Clean the plug (18) using a clean, dry cloth.
· If the seal (20) is worn replace it.
18 17
1-008113-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
43- Place the filter (19) on the plug cap (18).

44- Place the plug cap (18)/filter (19) assembly in/on the filter
block (17).
45- Hand-tighten the plug (18).
46- If necessary, clean the assembly using a clean, dry cloth.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

49- Check the circuit seals while the machine is in operation. 19 20 18
1-008114-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-008 Removal/refit: nozzle seals. 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never apply grease when fitting the nozzle seal (1).

molds. Some procedures may, however, require an
intervention
interventi on on a hot mold. In these cases always follow
the following safety instructions:
- Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and
face during any work on the mold support unit.
Depending on the machine configuration, the nozzle

1-006030-01-xx.svg
seal (1) will come with a flat washer (6) or a threaded
washer (7).
When changing a production article, replace the nozzle

seal (1) and the washer, (6) or (7).
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- low pressure air circuit open, see proced
procedure
ure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
-
nozzle seal (1).

Consumables
Specific tools
- nozzle seal holding tool (2),
- ring pull tool (3).
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle seals. DM-008 2/4
Removal

3
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2
1-006329-01-xx.svg
3- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding tool
4
(2) and remove the ring (5) using the ring pull tool (3).
If there is a threaded washer (7), do not replace it.
4- Remove the washer (6).

Do not damage the thread on the ring (5).
5- Remove the nozzle seal (1).

Refit
6- Clean the nozzle tip (4), the ring (5) and the washer (6)
using a clean, dry cloth.
7- Replace the nozzle seal (1).
2 5 3
1-007790-01-xx.svg
5
1-007346-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-008 Removal/refit: nozzle seals. 2
If there is a threaded washer (7), make sure that it is 4

fully tightened.
9- Position the ring (5) on the nozzle tip (4).
10- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the tooling (2) and tighten the
7
ring (5) using the ring pull (3).
11- Bring the next blow station around to your working
position using the JOG system, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 5 1
12- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have replaced all
of the nozzle seals (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
F Check all of the nozzle seals (1) with the machine in
production.
1-010393-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle seals. DM-008 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-010 Removal/refit: spindle chain links 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always use original parts to ensure

ensure that they have been
commissioned and self-lubricated (except when fitting
new parts).
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see 1-006030-21-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
- outer elastic ring grip.
PROCEDURE
Removal
2
machine.
2- Slightly
sprocketsloosen
(1) (thethe spindle
spring chain toassembly
and washer free the isspindle
about
"BRM-003..
300 mm long), see procedure "BRM-003 3 4
3- Note the respective positions of the spindle sprockets
(1) and the sheaths (2) on the links (3 ; 4).
4- Remove the spindle sprockets (1) on the relevant link, see
procedure "BDM-013.
"BDM-013.
5- Remove the elastic rings (5).
6- Remove the sheaths (2).
The spindle chain may come away. 1
Do not degrease the sheaths (2). 1-006193-01-xx.svg

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: spindle chain links DM-010 2/2
7- Remove the H link (3).

2
8- Repeat steps 4 to 7 , to remove the required number of
H links (3).
Refit 3 4
Do not degrease the sheaths (2).
F Check the condition and cleanness of the H links (3).

F Check the condition and cleanness o f the articulat
articulated
ed links
5
(4).
1-006192-01-xx.svg
F Check the condition and the cleanness of the bushings
(6).
F Check the orientation of the seal plane (7) on the 7
bushings (6). 4
9- Position the articulated links (4) in the H links (3).
Always follow the orientation of the articulated links
(4) and the H links (3) with regard to the original setting.
6
10- Position the sheaths (2) in the links (3 ; 4).
11- Position the elastic rings (5).
12- Repeat steps 9 to 11 . 1-006194-01-xx.svg
The spindle chain is now secure.
13- Fit the spindle sprockets (1), see procedure "BDM-013.
"BDM-013.
14- Set the spindle chain tension, see procedure "BRM-003.
"BRM-003.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-011 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base

onto the spacer as this may affect their precise
positioning.

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
Working on hot molds or hot mold bases :
The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some
procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot
mold. In these cases always follow the following safety 1-006030-01-xx.svg
instructions:
Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face
stipulated risks.

and pressure.
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
- locking system holding brace ,
- Mold base removal/refit assistance (1),
- torque wrench
wrench 10 to 50 N.m,
- Clean, dry brush.
L PROCEDURE
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: molds and mold bases DM-011 2/4
Wear protective glasses. 5

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.

"BCU-013. 3 4
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
Insert the locking system holding brace, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases.
If yes.
2 1
· Stop the thermoregulator(s).
4- Shut off the supply to the hydraulic circuit, see 1-006195-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-008.
"BCU-008.
The mold body water circuit is closed.
The mold base water circuit is now closed.
5- Purge the circuit of a few centiliters, see
procedure "BDM-043.
"BDM-043.
Mold base
Removal
6- Disconnect the hoses (2).
7- Connect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1) to the
carriage (3) via the connector (4).
The carriage (3) is no longer carrying the mold base (5).
Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base
onto the spacer as this may affect their precise
positioning.
8- Remove the mold base (5).
Refit
6
9- Clean the carriage (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
10- Grease the carriage (3) using the "LUB A15" grease and 1
a paintbrush.
11- Position the mold base (5).
12- Disconnect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1).
13- Reconn
Reconnect
ect the mold base removal/refit
removal/refit assistance (1) to
its support (6).
14- Reconnect the hoses (2).
1-006196-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-011 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
Mold
Removal
15- Loosen the screws (7) but do not remove them.
16- Remove the flange (8). 10
17- Tilt out and remove the mold shell (9).

18- Repeat steps 15 to 17 , to remove the opposite mold 8
(9).
Refit 7
19- Clean all of the contact surfaces of the mold shell (10)
20- Grease the contact surfaces of the mold shell supports
(10) applying the "LUB A15" grease with a paintbrush.
1-006197-01-xx.svg
21- Position the mold shell (9) on its support (10).

22- Position the
the flange (8) so that it rests on the mold shell
(9).
10
Tighten thhe bolts (7) to a torque of 16,7 N.m. Make
sure that you use the right class of bolt (7) if you are
replacing them. The bolt (7) class is 12-9.
24- Repeat steps 21 to 23 , to fit the opposite mold shell 9
(9).
If the right mold shell is fitted with a heat sensor,
reconnect it during this procedure.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006198-01-xx.svg
25- Grease the mold cavities, see procedure "BGM-011.

"BGM-011.
26- Remove the locking system holding brace , see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
27- Close the mold supposupport
rt uni
unitt manually, see 10
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
F Make sure there is no excess stress when the mold 8
support unit closes.
F Make sure that the mold shells (9) do not come into
9
contact with the mold ba se (5).
28- Turn on the air and water supplies, see
procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
The mold body water circuit is open.
The mold base water circuit is open.
F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases.
If yes.
1-006199-01-xx.svg
· Start the related thermoregulator(s)..
F Check for leaks.
29- The
Disconnect the is
procedure JOG,
nowsee procedure "BCU-013.
complete. "BCU-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: molds and mold bases DM-011 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-012 Removal/refit: spindle tips 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
-
oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- bayonette spindle tip (2).
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths, 1-006030-22-xx.svg
- alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-residual).

Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the ejector (1) manually.
3- Remove the spindle tip (2) by hand.
1
If more force is required, use a hex wrench to remove
the spindle tip.
1-006204-01-xx.svg
Refit
2
4- Clean the end of the spindle shaft (3) and the new spindle
tip (2) using a clean, dry cloth.
5- Position the new spindle tip (2).
6- Clip the spindle tip (2).
3
1-007220-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: spindle tips DM-012 2/2
7- Clean the spindle tip (2) and the ejector (1) using the
clean, dry cloth. 2
Only use alcohol at 70 % and no other cleaning product

as this may damage the parts.
8- Disinfect the spindle tip (2) and the ejector (1) using a
paintbrush dipped in alcohol at 70 %.
9- Clip the ejector (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
10- Close the safety doors. 1-008766-01-xx.svg

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-013 Removal/refit: spindle sprockets 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets

designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the
spindle tip pointing downwards.
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- spindle sprocket.
Consumables
Specific tools
- outer elastic ring grip.
PROCEDURE
Removal

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1
2- Position the spindle sprocket you need to remove
oppositeor working position using the JOG system.
3 2
1-006207-03-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: spindle sprockets DM-013 2/2
3- Remove the spindle tip , see procedure "BDM-012.

"BDM-012.
To remove the lower sprocket, first remove the 2
adjacent upper sprockets.
4- Remove the elastic ring (1).
5- Remove the bayonet ring (2), spring (3) and support ring
(4).
4 3 2
1-010304-02-xx.svg
6- Remove the sprocket (5) / shaft (6) assembly.

Refit
Never grease the shaft (6), as it is lubricated by the self-

lubricating bushings.
7- Clean the sprocket (5) using a clean, dry cloth. 7
8- Position the sprocket
sprock et (5) / shaft (6) assembly in the sheath
(7).
6
9- Position the bayonet ring (2).
10- Position the elastic ring (1).
11- Fit the spindle tip, see procedure "BDM-012
"BDM-012..
BEFORE YOU FINISH 5

"BCU-013. 1-006206-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-014 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

MACHINE STATUS
- molds at production temperature,
- the machine is stopped,
1-006030-18-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005,,
- hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005
"BCU-005..
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Advance thethe stretching cylinder (1) in question on the
14 1 4 5 6
horizontal part of the stretching cam (2), using manual
procedure
rotation, see proced ure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
2- Switch off the low pressure air supply, see
procedure "BCU-008.
"BCU-008.
3- Isolate the main machine power circuit, see
procedure "BCU-011.
"BCU-011.
16
machine.
The control block (4) is now isolated from the low pressure
air circuit.
6- Remove the nut (5). 13 2 3
7- Remove the
the coil (6).
1-008057-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cylinder DM-014 2/4
8- Purge the stretching cylinder (1) using the button (7).

The stretching cylinder (1) is no longer blocked in the up- 1 8
position and the rod can slide freely.
The indicator (8) shows the level of residual pressure in
the cylinder.
9- Remove the nut (9). 7
10- Remove the fixing bolts (10).
Do not lose the fixing bolt washers. 12
11- Loosen the nut (11). 11

12- Unscrew the rod (12) on the stretching cylinder (1) using
the pipe wrench .
15
13- Remove the stretching cylinder (1).
The slide (13) rests on the stretching cam (2). 1-008059-01-xx.svg
Refit
Carry out the procedure on the horizontal part of the

stretching cam (2), the slide (13) in the up-position.
14- Position the stretching cylinder (1) on the support (14).
15- Screw the
the rod (12) into the ball-joint
ball-joint (15).
17
17- Position the fixing bolts (10) on the stretching cylinder
(1).
10
18- Tighten the fixing bolts (10).
19- Fit the nut (9) and tighten.
21- Fit the coil (6).
23- Turn on the low pressure air supply to the machine, see
procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
24- Close the safety doors. 9
25- Turn on the main machine circuit, see
1-008058-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002.
active.
The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position.
F Make sure that there are no leaks on the pneumatic
circuit.
F Check the ga p between the roll
roller
er (16) and the stretching
cam (2), see procedure BRM-044 .

F Check the setting of the upper stretching cylinder stop
shock absorber (17), see procedure BDM-069 .
30- Press the (20) key. L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-014 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder 2

cut off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

31- Position the stretching cylinder (1) at the rear of the
machine using the JOG system, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
machine.
F Check the slide guide (13).
36- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys
(21).
The number of the blowing station selected appears in the
zone (B).
The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now 18 19
active.
The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position. 1-010353-30-02.svg

A
The stretching cylinder stops at the down-position.
The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position.
cut off.
41- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. 20
B
21
1-010342-07-02.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cylinder DM-014 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-015 Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical
electrical circuit under power,
power, see
1-006030-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BC
"BCU-005
U-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock,
Specific tools
- stretching rod centering tool (11 ; 12),
- dummy stretching rod (10),
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite the
work station using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
"BCU-012.
machine. 1
3- Remove the
the stretching
stretchin g rod , see
see procedure "BDM-026.
"BDM-026.
If required, you can leave the base block (1) for the 2
"TORNADO" solenoid valves on the nozzle cylinder
"BDM-002..
(2), see procedure "BDM-002
8
4- Remove the fixing bolts (3) from the "TORNADO"
solenoid valves base block (1). 1-010698-01-xx.svg
5- Hold the base block (1) in the raised position.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle cylinder DM-015 2/4
6- Disconnect the nozzle cylinder (2) control distributor (5)

electrical connectors (4).
7- Disconnect the nozzle cylinder (2) low-pressure air supply
hoses (6).
The bolts (7) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222"

threadlock.
threadlo ck. You may find some difficulty loosening the 1
fixing bolts (7). 4
8- Remove the 4 fixing bolts (7) from the nozzle cylinder
(2) on the console (8). 5
2
9- Remove the nozzle cylinder (2).
6
14
1-010699-01-xx.svg
Refit
2
· If the seal (9) is worn replace it, see
procedure "BDM-032.
"BDM-032.
11- Clean the contact surfaces on the console (8) using a
clean, dry cloth. 8
12- With the spacer (14) present, clean it using a clean, dry
cloth and place it on the console (8). 7
13- Clean the contact surfaces on the nozzle cylinder (2)
using a clean dry cloth.
14- Position the nozzle cyclinder (2) on the console (8).
1-006212-01-xx.svg
15- Position the base block (1) for the solenoid valves
9
"TORNADO" on the nozzle cylinder using the 4 blocks
(3).
16- First tightening; tighten the bolts (3) crosswise to a torque 2
of 10 N.m.
17- Second tightening; tighten the bolts (3) crosswise to a
torque of 20 N.m.
Fit the bolts (7) having applied "LOCTITE 222" light
8
threadlock.
18- Position the 4 fixing bolts (7) but do not tighten. 1-006209-01-xx.svg
19- Fit the dummy stretching rod (10) in the nozzle cylinder
(2) / base block (1) assembly.
20- Center the 2 stretching cylinder centering tools (11 ; 12)
on the mold neck collar (13).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-015 Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder 3
21- Lower the dummy stretching rod (10) htrough the

centering tool (11 ; 12). 12 11
The nozzle cylinder (2) / (1) base block is centered.
The dummy stretching rod (10) should slide freely
through the stretching rod centering tools (11 ; 12).

22- Tighten the fixing bolts (7) crosswise to a torque of 20
N.m.
1-007419-01-xx.svg
23- Connect the electrical connectors (4).

10
11
13 12
1-007836-01-xx.svg
25- Remove the dummy stretching rod (10).

26- Remove the centering tools (11 ; 12).
27- Fit the stretching rod corresponding to your production
producti on set
up, see procedure "BDM-026.
"BDM-026.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1
F Check the solenoid valves TORN ADO and the nozzle
cylinder, see procedure BPU-006
BPU-006..
2
1-010700-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle cylinder DM-015 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM
BDM-016 Rem
Remova
val/
l/rref
efit
it:: se
sea
al and co
com
mpensa
sati
tio
on sp
sprrings
ings (si
sin
ngle holdin
lding
g bar) (HR)
HR) 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Visually identifying the type of holding bar :

- Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BDM-016".
- Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BDM-050".

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
Do not damage the mold shells.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS A B
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
1-007335-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- 1 compensation seal (8),
- 96 elastic rings (5).
Consumables
- cleaning agent "Net A04".
Specific tools
- set of thickness gauges ,
- 2 slings (9)
(9) supplied with the set of molds.
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) DM-016 2/4
Removal
10
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.

-013.
3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see 7
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
4- Insert the locking system
system holding brace, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
5- Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the left shell support
(1) and the left mold shell (10).
6- Remove the nuts (2) and the washers (3).
7- Remove the external boxes (4). 1

1-006318-03-xx.svg
9- Remove the inner boxes (6).
10- Remove the left half-shell support (1) from the support
6 3 2
block (7). X
11- Remove the compensation seal (8).
Refit 4
Never apply grease when fitting the compensation seal

(8).
12- Remove the grease from the left half-shell support (1) and
the left support block (7) using a cloth dipped in cleaning 5
agent "NET A04".
13- Position the new seal (8) on the left half-shell support
(1).
2
14- Position the slings (9) to hold the seal (8) on the left half
shell support (1).
15- Position the left half-shell support (1) in the left support 2
block (7).
16- Position the inner boxes (6).
18- Position the outer boxes (4). 7
1-007317-01-xx.svg

20- Tighten up the nuts (2) so that the left half shell support
(1) is clamped against the left support block (7).
21- Remove the slings (9). 8
Tighten the nuts (2) diagonally to position the left half

shell support correctly (1). 1
22- Tighten the nuts (2) to obtain a gap of X = 1,2 +/-0,05

mm between the inner and outer boxes (6 ; 4).
23- Reconnect the hydraulic lines to the left shell support
24- Remove the locking system
system holding brace , see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
L
1-006320-01-xx.svg E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM
BDM-016 Rem
Remova
val/
l/rref
efit
it:: se
sea
al and co
com
mpensa
sati
tio
on sp
sprrings
ings (si
sin
ngle holdin
lding
g bar) (HR)
HR) 3
If there is any resistance when closing

closin g the mold support
unit adjust the compensation system, see
procedure "BRM-021.
"BRM-021.
procedure "BSU-001
"BSU-001..
9 8
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
27- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have replaced all
of the compensation seals and rings.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
28- Re-adjust the compensation system, see 1

procedure "BRM-021
"BRM-021..
position using the JOG system.
30- Repeat as above from step 28 until you have set up all of
1-006458-01-xx.svg
the mold suport units.
31- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) DM-016 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-017 Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

machine.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2
"BCU-013.
3
3- Purge the stretching
stretchi ng cylinder using the button (2).
The stretching cylinder is no longer blocked in the up-
The indicator (3) indicates the pressure
press ure remaining in the
cyclinder.
4- Lower the slide (4) manually.
1-006371-03-xx.svg
5- Remove the
the counter-nut (5).
7- Remove the
the absorber (1) on the slide (4).
Refit
8- Clean the contact surfaces of the slide (4), the nut (6) and
the counter nut (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust DM-017 2/2
9- Screw the new absorber (1) fully into the nut (6).
10- Screw the absorber (1)/nut (6) assembly fully into the
slide (4).
11- Tighten the lock-nut (5). 1
12- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC, see

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 4 5
1-006506-01-xx.svg

The secure low pressure air system of the machine is
supplied.
The stretching cylinder stops at the up-position.
The secure low pressure air system of the machine is no
longer supplied.
15- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 1 until
the complete replacement of the
t he dampers (1) of the lower
stretch stop
1-010349-03-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-018 Removal/refit: upstream feed unit 1
MACHINE STATUS
- infeed rail (1) and feed block (2) cleared of preforms,
-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths. 1-007021-07-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

machine.
1
4
1-006216-01-xx.svg
2- If the optional UV rail is fitted, remove the panels (8).

3- Loosen the 2 cross-nuts (3).
4- Remove the 2 locking nuts (4).
6- Remove the feed block (2).
Refit
7- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (2) using a
clean, dry cloth.
8- Position the feed block (2).
10- Tighten the cross-nuts (3 ; 4).
11- Make sure that the feed block (2) is fitted securely. 8
1-006807-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: upstream feed unit DM-018 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH 2 4
12- Check the gap at the roller (6), stabilizer rails (7), infeed
rail (1) assembly using a preform.
·
Set the gap between the rails (6), see
-013.
· Set the gap at the stabilizer rails (7), see
-017.
· Set the infeed rail (1), see procedure "BRM -011.
-011. 5
1-006215-01-xx.svg
13- If the optional UV rail is fitted, refit the panels (8).

7 6
1-006217-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-019 Removal/refit: downstream feed unit 1
MACHINE STATUS
- rail and infeed wheel cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
1-006030-10-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Open the safety
safety doors at the relevant zone on the
machine.
1-006218-02-xx.svg
The visual may be different depending on the machine 3

model ad configuration.
2- Remove the pipe (1).
4- Remove the feed block (3).
If necessary change the infeed wheel, see
1
procedure "BDM-020,
"BDM-020, before refitting.
Refit
5- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (3) using a
clean, dry cloth.
6- Clean the infeed block (3).
Position the infeed block (3) using the guide studs.
2
7- Fit the infeed block (3).
8- Tighten the bolts (2). 1-010468-01-xx.svg
9- Fit the pipe (1).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: downstream feed unit DM-019 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-020 Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- infeed wheel cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

machine.
2- Remove the feed block (1), see procedure "BDM -019.
-019.
3 2 1
Move and retain the preform detection assembly (5)
without removing it in order to withdraw the wheel (3).
4- Move the preform detection assembly (5).
1-006084-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: preform infeed turntable DM-020 2/2

4 5
6- Remove the infeed wheel (3).
Refit
7- Clean the infeed wheel (3) and its support using a clean,
dry cloth.
position the wheel (3) using the guide studs.
8- Fit the infeed wheel (3).

10- Make sure that the infeed wheel is securely fitted.
11- Position the preform detection assembly (5).
13- Fit the infeed block (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007444-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-021 Removal/refit: infeed guide 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

machine.
without removing it in order to withdraw the infeed guide
(2).
3 4
5- Remove the infeed wheel (2).
1-007444-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: infeed guide DM-021 2/2
Refit
6- Clean the infeed guide (2) and its support using a clean,
dry cloth.
Position the infeed guide (2) using the guide studs.
7- Fit the infeed guide (2).

9- Make sure that the infeed guide (2) is securely fitted.
10- Position the preform detection assembly (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-022 Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

machine.
4 5
without removing it in order to withdraw the infeed guide
(1).
4- Pivot out the retractable infeed guide (1) manually.
1-007444-01-xx.svg

Refit
6- Clean the retractable infeed guide (1) and the mobile
support (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
Position the retractable infeed guide (1) using the guide
studs.
7- Fit the retractable infeed guide (1) on the mobile support
(3).
9- Make sure that the retractable infeed guide (1) is securely
fitted.
10- Position the preform detection assembly (5). 1 2 3
L
E 1-006084-04-xx.svg
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: infeed retractable guide DM-022 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-023 Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The oven wheel infeed wheel is composed of 3 sectors
each of the
reference at same dimension. Each sector is carries a
its edge.
MACHINE STATUS
- all machine power and utilitie s
utilities turned off, see
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- infeed and oven cleared of preforms.
1-006030-10-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
2
machine.
2- Remove the feed block , see procedure "BDM -019.
-019. 3
3- Remove the infeed wheel , see procedure "BDM -020.

-020.
4- Remove the infeed wheel , see procedure
procedure "BDM -021.
-021.
Note the order in which the infeed wheel (1) is
assembled. 1
5- Position the first sector on the oven wheel (2) infeed

1-006220-01-xx.svg
wheel (1) opposite the working position using the JOG
system, see procedure "BCU -013
-013..
6- Remove the bolts (3) from the first sector on the infeed
wheel (1).
7- Remove the first sector of the infeed wheel (1).
Refit
8- Clean the 3 sectors on the infeed wheel (1) using a clean,
dry cloth.
9- Clean the mountings on the first sector of the infeed wheel 4
(1) using a clean, dry cloth.
10- Position the first sector on the infede wheel (1) on the 2
oven wheel (2) using the centering pins (4).
11- Insert the bolts (3) into the first sector on the infeed wheel
(1) and tighten up.
12- Position the
the next sector opposite
opposite the working position 1-006219-01-xx.svg
using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
13- Repeat steps 6 and 12 to replace the second and third
sectors on the infeed wheel.
L
E 14- Fit the infeed guides, see procedure "BDM -021.
-021.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable DM-023 2/2
15- Fit the preform infeed wheel, see procedure "BDM -020
-020..
16- Fit the infeed block , see procedure "BDM -019.
-019.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-024 Removal/refit: transfer grips 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The preform and bottle transfer grips are different; the

preform transfer grips are spread further apart than the
bottle transfer grips.
Do not invert the preform and bottle grips when refitting

them.
1-006030-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical circuit under
under power, see
procedure "BCU-001
"BCU-001,,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2
Parts
- transfer grips. 1
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths, 4 5
- light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock.
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Open the safety doors at the
the relevant zone on th
thee
machine.
2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see 5 4
procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
"BCU-036. 6 1
4- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position
using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013. 2
5- Hold the right grip (1).
3
7- Remove the grip (1)/screw (2)/washer (3) assembly.
8- Hold the left grip (4). 1-010323-01-xx.svg

10- Remove the grip (4)/screw (5)/washer (6) assembly.
L Refit
E
D
I
S
11- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: transfer grips DM-024 2/2
12- If necessary, fit the screw (2 ; 5) and the washer (3 ; 6) on

the grip (1 ; 4).
13- Apply a little light
light threadlock on
on the bolts (2 ; 5).
14- Position the right grip and hold it (1).
16- Position the left grip and hold it (4).
18- Repeat steps 4 to 17 , to replace all of the transfer grips
(1 ; 3).
"BCU-036.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-025 Removal/refit: nozzle tip 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
open position
procedure before. attempting any work on it, see
"BSU-001
"BSU-001.

molds. Some procedures may, however, require an
intervention
interventi on on a hot mold. In these cases always follow
the following safety instructions:
- Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and
face during any work on the mold support unit.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
You do not always need to open and close the mold 3

support unit; that will
wi ll depend on the height of the nozzle
tip (3).
1 2
When changing a production article, replace the rim
support (9).
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
1-010139-01-xx.svg
- "BCU-004,,
"Settin gs",
"BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
- nozzle seal holding tool (1),
- nozzle cylinder piston rod holding tool (2),
- spanner wrench (3).
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle tip DM-025 2/4
Removal

2 6
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3 5
1-010380-01-xx.svg

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
4- Insert the locking system holding brace, see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. 2 6
5- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston
rod holding tool (2).
6- Loosen the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3).
1 4
1-010379-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-025 Removal/refit: nozzle tip 2
7- Loosen the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding tool
(1). 8
8- Remove the nozzle tip (4). 7
9- Remove the spring thrust (7).
12
10- Remove the spring (8). 9
11- Remove the rim support (9).
12- Remove the nozzle ring (15) and the washer (16), see 10
procedure "BDM-008.
"BDM-008. 11
Refit
13- Clean the nozzle
nozzle tip (4), the spring
spring thrust (7), the spring 14
(8) and the rim support (9) using a clean, dry cloth. 4
13
16
15
17
1-007833-02-xx.svg
F Check the O-ring (12).
·
F
If the
Check theseal (12) isaworn
presence replace it.
nd condition of the spacer (13).
· If the spacer (13) is worn, replace it..
14- Position the washer (17)/nozzle seal (15 )/washer (16 )
assembly on the nozzle tip (4), see
procedure "BDM-008.
"BDM-008.
15- Position the rim support (9).
16- Position the spring (8). 9
17- Position the spring thrust (7).

1-007834-01-xx.svg
F Verify that the ring (14) is present.
F Make s ure that the safety ring is in the correct position on
the nozzle (11).
F Make sure that the spacer is in the correct position (10).
The chamfer on the spacer (10) should be facing

upwards.
18- Clean the piston
piston rod (6) using a clean,
clean, dry cloth.
19- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) by hand.
10
20- Fit the nozzle tip (4).
21- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston
rod holding tool (2). 11
22- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) using the holding tool (1).
23- Tighten the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3).
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. 4
25- Close the mold support unit manually.

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1-010381-01-xx.svg
27- Repeat as above, from step 3 for each nozzle tip (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
L 28- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

"BCU-013.
E
D
I The procedure is now complete.
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: nozzle tip DM-025 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-026 Removal/refit: stretching rod 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- stretching station in question, in raised position.
electr circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 2
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 3
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 1
Consumables
Specific tools
1-007318-01-xx.svg
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
Removal

1- Connect the
the JOG to the work zone,
zone, see procedure "BCU
-013..
-013
-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching rod DM-026 2/2
3- Clean the lip seal (5) using a clean, dry brush.

5
1-006698-01-xx.svg

7
6- Pull the indexing pin (2).
The stretching rod (1) is no longer locked on the shaft. 6
Turn and raise the stretching rod manually (1) to extract
it from the casing (3).
7- Remove the stretching rod (1).
Refit
8- Clean the stretching rod (1) using a clean, dry cloth.
9- Carefully insert the stretching rod (1) into the casing (3). 1
1-007319-01-xx.svg
10- Pull the indexing the pin (2) and insert the stretching rod
2 4
(1) fully into the casing (3).
11- Release the indexing pin (2).
12- Manually turn the stretching rod (1) until the indexing pin
clicks in (2). rod (1) is now locked.

The stretching
F Check that the indexing pin (2) is up against the nut (4).
14- Tighten the nut (6). 3
F Make sure that the stretching rod (1) is securely fitted.
15- Repeat as above from stage 2 until you have replaced all
of the stetching rods (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007371-01-xx.svg
16- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-027 Removal/refit: stretching cam 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

- the first technician, situated on the upper part of the
chassis, disassembles and assembles the
stretching cam,
- the second technician, situated at the foot of the
machine, handles the stretching cam.
1-006030-33-xx.svg
The angular position of the stretching cam depends on

the process, and in particular the position of the "P0"
and "P10" points, see procedure "BPU-010.
"BPU-010. 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables 1-010353-04-02.svg

Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cam DM-027 2/4

The (A) window appears. A

The machine is now supplied with low pressure air.
The stretching cylinders stop in raised position.
1-010342-02-02.svg

3 6
machine.
4- Remove the nut (3) and the washer (4).
5- Disassemble the support (5) / "B13.0" sensor (6).
Mark the angular position of the stretching cam (7).
4 5

7- Disassemble the cam segment (9).
8- Remove the fixing bolts (10). 12
9- Disassemble the bracket (11).
11- Slide the stretching cam (7) to the edge of the chassis
(13).
12- Remove the stretching cam (7).
Refit
13- Clean the bearing surfaces of the chassis (13) and the
stretching cam (7).
14- Position the stretching cam (7) according to the angular
position defined by the process.
16- Position the bracket (11).
9 8 12 7 13
1-008357-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-027 Removal/refit: stretching cam 2

18- Position the cam segment (9).
20- Position the support (5) / "B13.0" sensor (6) assembly.
21- Position the nut (3) and the washer (4).
23- Load the required production recipe, see
procedure "BPU-005.
"BPU-005.
24- Set points "P0" and "P10", see procedure "BPU-001
"BPU-001..
11 10
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cam DM-027 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-028 Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide 1
MACHINE STATUS
- oven outfeed cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None 1-006030-05-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Bring the transfer grips around using the JOG system to
free the oven outfeed guide (1), see procedure "BCU
-013..
-013
4- Remove the oven outfeed guide (1).
Refit
5- Clean the oven outfeed guide (1) and the contact surfaces
surface s
6- Position the oven outfeed guide (1) using the guide pins.
8- Make sure that the oven outfeed guide (1) is securely
fitted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
9- Close the safety doors. 1 2

1-006227-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: oven outfeed guide DM-028 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-029 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command) 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with

lower controls.
Removing the stretching cylinder will make removing
and refitting the distributer easier, see
procedure "BDM-014.
"BDM-014.

regulations.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 3 1

e lectrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 6
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

5 2
Parts
- stretching distributer seal (7), 1-006229-01-xx.svg
- stretching distributer (6).

Consumables
6
- "LUB 28" grease, supplied with the set of seals.
Specific tools 9
- Clean, dry brush,
PROCEDURE
Removal
7 8
work station
station using manual
manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
1-006228-01-xx.svg

"BCU-012.
machine.

4- Remove the control support (2).
5- Remove the * 1 fixing bolts (3).
6- Remove the purge block (4).
L
E 7- Loosen the screws (5) but do not remove them.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command) DM-029 2/2
8- Remove the stretching cylinder (6).

Refit
10- Clean the base (8), the purge block (4) and the control
11- Grease the groove (9) for the stretching distributer seal
6
(7) and the stretching distributer (6) using the "LUB 28"
grease.
12- Position the stretching distributer seal (7) in the groove
(9) on the stretching distributer (6).
13- Grease the surface of the stretching distributer (7) using 9
the "LUB 28".
14- Position the new distributer (6) on the base (8).
7
N.m.
1-006230-01-xx.svg
16- Position the purge block (4) on the stretching distributer
(6).
17- Tighten the bolts (3) to a torque of 2 N.m.
18- Position the control support (2) on the stretching
distributer (6).
19- Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of 1,5 N.m.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

21- Control the performance
performance of the stretching
stretching cyclinder , see
procedure "BPU-006.
"BPU-006.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1 / 10 BDM-030 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with

lower controls.
To carry out this operation, remove the cylinder from the
machine, see procedure "BDM-014.
"BDM-014.
If you are using a vice, make sure that the jaws are
shaped to the cylinder body so as not to damage it.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- set of seals. 1
Consumables
-
Clean, dry cloths,
- "LUB 28" grease, supplied with the set of seals.
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush,
- thin, non-metallic spatula.
- grips for inner elastic rings.
PROCEDURE 1-006257-01-xx.svg
Removing the cylinder rod

1- Remove the stretching cylinder , see
procedure "BDM-029.
"BDM-029.
2- Disconnect the hose connecting the top and bottom
sections of the cylinder.
4- Loosen the bolts (2).
1-006260-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: stretching cylinder seals DM-030 2 / 10
5- Remove the base (3).

Do not remove the non-return valve and the silencers
from the base (3).
3
25
1-006258-01-xx.svg
6- Remove the counter-nut (4).
1-006101-01-xx.svg
1-006259-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the holding plate (6) and the end-piece from the
cylinder body (7).
6 7
1-006253-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24

8
1-006249-01-xx.svg
10- Remove the base block (9).

Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body.
1-006254-01-xx.svg
11- Remove the cylinder rod (10).
10
1-006250-01-xx.svg
Removing the seals

12- Clean the cylinder rod (10) using a clean, dry brush.
Never use objects that may damage these parts,
especially their ridges and grooves. 13
13- Remove the supporting segment (11).

11
12
1-006251-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
14- Remove the 2 lip-seals (12 ; 13) using a fine, non-metallic

spatula.
12
1-006255-01-xx.svg
15- Remove the O-ring (14) from the cylinder body end-piece
(7).
14
1-006252-01-xx.svg
16- Remove the 2 lip-seals (15 ; 16) using a fine, non-metallic

16
spatula.
15
1-006256-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
17- Remove the 2 O-rings (17 ; 18) located on the cylinder

end-piece (7) on the base block (9). 9
17
18
1-006241-01-xx.svg
18- Remove the cusioning seal (19) from the base block (9)
using a fine, non-metallic spatula.
19
1-006245-01-xx.svg
9 20
1-006242-01-xx.svg
20- Remove the flow valve (21).

22
21- Remove the seal (22) from the flow valve (21).
21
9
1-006246-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Fitting the seals
Grease the seal grooves, the seals and the cylinder rod
(10) applying the grease "LUB 28" with a paintbrush.
Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body.
22- Clean the cylinder rod and the seal grooves using
usi ng a clean
dry cloth.
1-006247-01-xx.svg
1-006243-01-xx.svg
23- Position the lip-seal (12) on the rod (10).

Fit the lip-seal (12) into its groove making sure that the
lipped sections are facing outwards.
12
1-006244-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
24- Position the supporting segment (11) on the rod (10).
10
11
1-006238-01-xx.svg
25- Insert the rod (10) into the cylinder body (23).
26- Push the rod (10) to the other side of the cylinder body
(23) to access (only) the lip-sea; groove (13).
10
23
1-006248-01-xx.svg
27- Position the lip-seal (13) in the groove.

28- Insert the cylinder rod (10) fitted with the 2 lip-seals (12 ;
13) into the cylinder body (23).
23 10
13
1-006234-01-xx.svg
29- Grease the end of the cylinder rod (10) applying

applyin g the "LUB
23
28" grease with clean, dry paintbrush.
30- Clean the cylinder body end-piece (7) using a clean dry
cloth.
10
1-006239-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
31- Grease the seal groove (24) using the "LUB 28" grease.
24 7
1-006235-01-xx.svg
32- Position the seal (16) into the groove as shown in the
illustration.
16 7
1-006236-01-xx.svg
33- Position the seal (15) into the groove as indicated in the
illustration.
34- Clean the cylinder base block (9) using a clean, dry cloth.
35- Grease the base block supports (9) using the "LUB 28"
grease.
15
1-006240-01-xx.svg
36- Position the cushioning

cushioni ng seal (19) in its groove as indicated
in the illustration.
37- Position the seal (22) on the flow valve (21).
38- Screw the flow valve (21) into the base block (9) without 19
tightening it..
39- Position the elastic ring (20). 9
40- Position the seals (14 ; 17 ; 18 ) on the base block (9) on
the cylinder body end-piece (7).
1-006237-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Assembling the various cylinder components

6 7
41- Position the base block (9) on the cylinder body (23).
43- Fit the cylinder body end-piece (7) and the holding plate 23
(6) on the cylinder body (23).
The screw-holes (24) on the holding plate (6), the 5
connector (25) on the cylinder body end-piece (7) and
the pneumatic connector on the base block (9) should
all be lined up with each other.
1-006233-01-xx.svg
44- Lightly screw in the fixing bolts (5).

25
45- Screw the check nut (4) on the cylinder rod (10).
46- Position the base (3) on the connector (25).
24
7
50- Connect the hose (26) connecting the top and bottom
sections of the cylinder.
1-006231-01-xx.svg
51- Fit the stretching cylinder , see procedure "BDM-029.

"BDM-029.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Operating checks
F Check the cylinder before fitting it onto the machine
it has not been damaged,
the air purge works properly 7 bar,
the non-return air valve works efficiently 7 bar, 21
there are no leaks.
Adjusting the cylinder damping
52- Tighten up the flow valve (21) as far as it will go.
53- Loosen the flow valve (21) by 2½ two turns.
Reset the damping system afer the first few machine
operating cycles. 26
Fitting the equipped cylinder on the machine
54- see procedure "BDM -014.
-014.
1-006232-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-031 Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attempt to run the machine if all of the lower

stretching thrusts are not identical.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
"BCU-013.
3- Raise the lower stretching thrust (1) on the support (2) 1
manually.
The lower thrust is now removed.
Refit
4- Clean the contact surfaces on the lower thrust (1) using 2
a clean, dry cloth.

6- Grease the contact surfaces on the lower stretching
stretc hing thrust
(1) using the "LUB A15" grease.
1-006200-01-xx.svg
7- Position the lower strtching thrust (1) in the support (2).
8- Check the contact between the contact surfaces on the
1
lower stretching thrust (1) and the support (2).
9- If necessary, reset the lower the stretching thrust (1), see
procedure "BRM-009.
"BRM-009.
10- Repeat steps 2 to 9 until you have replaced all of the lower
stretching thrusts.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit:
emoval/refit: lower stretching thrusts DM-031 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1 / 18 BDM-032 Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke) 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure applies to cylinders "11279186" and

similar. The references used in this procedures do not
apply to the cylinder drawing.
This procedure assumes that the following units have
been removed:
- solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on base, see
procedure "BDM-002,
"BDM-002,
- nozzle tip, see procedure "BDM-025,
"BDM-025,
- nozzle cylinder distributors, see
1-006757-01-xx.svg
procedure "BDM-036
"BDM-036,,
- nozzle cylinder, see procedure "BDM-015.
"BDM-015.
Removing the solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

from the machine is not obligatory but it does make the
procedure and the inspection easier.
This procedure does not cover the maintenance of the

"BDM-008..
nozzle seal, see procedure "BDM-008
4 3
1-007661-01-xx.svg
Follow the hygiene precautions.

1-006548-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
econditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke) DM-032 2 / 18
Only use recommended products. A 14 24 ; 25 23 10
Never use oil or grease when fitting the seals of these

18 ; 19 13
parts unless it is specifically recommended.
The stretching rod and the process air both pass 26 ; 27 11
34 33
15 ; 16 2
12
46 ; 47
49 20 17 21 ; 22 28
1-007663-01-xx.svg
Never use objects that may damage these parts, B 39 36

especially their ridges and grooves.
41
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 45
Parts
35
- 1 set of spare SIDEL seals (A),
- the cylinder drawing (see set of drawings supplied with
the machine).
Consumables 44
43
- light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock,
threadlock,
40
- cleaning agent "NETA03".
Specific tools
48 37 1 42 38
- set of special SIDEL tools for the cylinder (B),
- torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m, 1-007662-01-xx.svg
- grips for inner elastic rings,
- plastic mallet,
- small box-cutter.
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Remove the seal (2) from the cylinder (3) using the scriber
(1).
2- Remove the 2 fixing bolts (4).
The bolts (4) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222"
threadlock.
threadlo ck. You may find some difficulty loosening the
fixing bolts (4).
3- Separate the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the
body (6) by gently tapping the piston (5) with the mallet. L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
4- Remove the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the

body (6).
3 6 5
1-007664-01-xx.svg
5- Remove the piston (5).
3 5 6
1-007665-01-xx.svg
6- Remove the middle piston (7).

3 5
1-007666-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
7- Remove the elastic ring (8) from the cylinder (3).
3 7
1-007667-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the spacer (9) and the diffuser (10) from the
cylinder (3). 3 10 9 8
The diffuser (10) has been tightened on, use a jet if
necessary.
1-007668-01-xx.svg
Protect the cylinder (3) during cutting of the upper stop

(11).
9- Cut the upper stopper (11) using the box-cutter.
10 9 8 3
1-007669-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
10- Remove the upper stopper (11).

The presence of a scraper seal (13) depends on the
model of the nozzle cylinder. 11
It is recommended to leave the scraper seal (13) in

place whatever its level of wear.
Removal of the scraper seal (13) risks damaging its

housing and rendering the body (6) useless.
12- Remove the guide belt (14) using the scriber (1). 12
1-007670-01-xx.svg
13- Remove the seal (15) and the accompanying O-ring

(16) using the scriber (1).
14- Remove the guide (17) from the piston (5).
13 15 ; 16 14 6
1-007672-01-xx.svg
16- Remove the guide (20) from the piston (5).

17- Remove the seals (21) and the accompanying O-rings
18 ; 19 17
1-007674-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
Protect the middle piston (7) while cutting the upper 5

stop (23).
18- Cut the upper stopper (23) using the box-cutter.
20
21 ; 22
1-007675-01-xx.svg
19- Remove the upper stopper (23).

23 24 ; 25 7
1-007676-01-xx.svg
22- Remove the middle piston (7) guide bands (28).

27 26 7
1-007677-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Do not separate the solenoids (29) from their base 7

(30).
24- Remove the cover (32).
28
1-007678-01-xx.svg
25- Remove the guide (33) from the base (30).

29
31
30
32
1-006156-02-xx.svg
26- Remove the scraper seal (34) from the cover (32).
33
30
1-006157-02-xx.svg
Refit
Nozzle cylinder
27- Clean the body (6), cylinder (3), piston (5), middle piston
(7), spacer (9) and cover (32) using a clean cloth and 34 32
cleaning fluid "NETA03".
Recondition the cylinder (3)
1-006159-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
28- Position the upper stopper (11) on the cylinder (3) using
the tooling (35).
35 12 2 11 3 10 8 9
1-007679-01-xx.svg

3 11 35
1-007680-01-xx.svg
The diffuser (10) has been tightened on, use a jet if

necessary.
30- Place the diffuser (10) in the cylinder (3).
31- Place the spacer (9) in the cylinder (3).
Reconditioning the piston (5)
3 12
1-007681-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
33- Position the guides (17 ; 20) in the piston (5).

36 38 39
34- Place the O-rings (22) in the piston (5).
Make the seal (21) into a heart shape.
35- Position the seals (21).
37 21 ; 22 5 20 18 ; 19 17
1-007682-01-xx.svg
36- Position the drift (36) in the piston (5).
21
1-007683-01-xx.svg

38- Position the drift (37) on the piston (5).
Do not damage the seal (18), position it carefully at the
end.
39- Position the seal (18) using the pushing device (38).
5 36
1-007684-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
40- Remove the chuck (37).

41- Position the calibration sleeve (39) on the piston (5).
18 38
37
5 19
1-007685-01-xx.svg
42- Disassemble the calibration sleeve (39).

Reconditioning the middle piston (7)
18 39 5 36
1-007686-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
44- Place the guide bands (28) in the middle piston (7).
36 41 7 40 42
42 43
42
45- Place the O-ring (27) in the middle piston (7).
46- Place the seal (26) in the middle piston (7).
24 ; 25 28 26 ; 27 23
1-007687-01-xx.svg

48- Position the chuck (40) on the middle piston (7).
Do not damage the seal (24), position it carefully at the
28
end.
49- Position the seal (24) using the pushing device (41).
26 ; 27
1-007688-01-xx.svg

51- Place the calibration sleeve (42) on the middle piston (7)
41
40
25 24
7
1-007689-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
52- Disassemble the calibration sleeve (42).

53- Position the chuck (43) on the middle piston (7).
54- Position the upper stop (23) on the middle piston (7) using
the calibration sleeve (42).
42
1-007690-01-xx.svg

56- Position the chuck (36) in the middle piston (7).
Leave the drift (36) in position for the rest of the

procedure. 42
23
43
1-007691-01-xx.svg
Recondition the body (6)
36
1-007692-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
57- Position the guide (14) in the body (6).

58- Place the O-ring (16) in the body (6). 6 45 44
59- Place the seal (15) in the body (6).
15 ; 16 14 35
1-007693-01-xx.svg
60- Position the tool (35) so as to bear on the body (6).

The tooling (35) calibrates the body seals (6).
6 14 15 ; 16
1-007694-01-xx.svg
Assemble the nozzle cylinder 35

61- Place the body (6) on a hollow support to facilitate the
operations.
62- Place the sleeve (44) in the body (6).
63- Place the piston (5) in the body (6).
6
1-007695-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
64- Remove the sleeve (44).

65- Position the sleeve (45) on the body (6).
66- Place the middle piston (7), equipped with the chuck
(36), in the body (6). 5
44
1-007696-01-xx.svg
67- Remove the sleeve (45).

68- Place the cylinder (3) on the chuck (36).
36
45
1-007697-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
69- Place the cylinder (3) in the pistons (5 ; 7) and the body
(6).
The cylinder (3) pushes the drift (36) out of the piston
(5).
36
1-007698-01-xx.svg

36 5 6 3
threadlock.
71- Tighten the bolts (4) to a torque of 10 Nm.
1-007699-01-xx.svg
72- Position the seal (2) on the cylinder (3).
4
1-007700-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
TORNADO solenoid valve assembly

2 3
1-007701-01-xx.svg
73- Place the O-ring (46) in the guide (33).
33 48
34
49 46 ; 47
1-007702-01-xx.svg

47
74- Place the seal (47) in the guide (33).
46
33
1-007703-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
75- Position the calibration drift (48) in the guide (33).

48
77- Remove the calibration drift (48).
78- Position the guide (33) in the base (30).

79- Position the scraper seal (34) in the cover (27).
80- Position the cover (27) on the base (25).
49 33
1-007704-01-xx.svg

Nm.
34 32
1-006180-02-xx.svg
82- Position the protective stopper (50) on the cover (27).
30 31
32
1-006181-02-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
83- Check that the piston slides manually.

50
If the cylinder is not being fitted on the machine
immediately, insert the stoppers into the cylinder
openings to protect it.
84- Sign off the operation on the machine's worksheet.
1-006182-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-033 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace all of the brake pads in a braking system

when carryng out any operation on it.
Use the safety bolt (1) supplied and fitted

fitt ed on the braking
system.
This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians.

1-006030-17-xx.svg
The braking system opens pneumatically and is drawn 3 19

closed by a vacuum (see User manual).
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems. 4
Wear latex gloves. 2
MACHINE STATUS
1-006094-02-xx.svg
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 6
- friction pads (3 ; 4).
Consumables
- latex gloves,
Specific tools
- safety bolt (1),
- spring puller ,
1-007075-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
"BSU-003.
machine.
3- Remove the fixing bolts from the cover plate (6).
4- Remove the cover plate (6).
8- Remove the silencer (10).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: braking system friction pads DM-033 2/4
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 7

pressed in. system is now open.

The braking
8 9
Fully tighten the safety bolt (1).
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always

use a socket wrench.
Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.
1-006202-01-xx.svg
10- The second technician positions the safety bolt (1).

11
The braking system jaws are secured.
11- When the second technician gives the order, the first
technician releases the push-button (11).
12- Remove the spring (12) using the spring puller.
13- Loosen the counter-nut (13) but do not remove it.
14- Loosen the flow valve (14) but do not remove it.
15- Loosen the bolt (15) but do not remove it.
16- Loosen the nuts (16) but do not remove them.
18- Pivot the arm (18).
The friction pad (3) separates from the brake disc (19).
19- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the
friction pad (3).
20- Remove the friction pad (3).
21- Loosen the bolt (17). 1-006603-04-xx.svg
22- Pivot the arm (20).

The friction pad (4) separates from the brake disc (19).
23- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the
friction pad (4).
24- Remove the friction pad (4).
Refit
15 12 16
25- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic
support.
26- Position the friction pad (4). 13 3
28- Pivot the arm (18). 14 4
29- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic

support. 17
30- Position the friction pad (3).

31- Set the position of the friction pads (3 ; 4), see
procedure "BRM-012.
"BRM-012.
32- Position the spring (12) using the spring puller. 10 1
L
E
1-006261-01-xx.svg ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-033 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads 3
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the

(2) technicians is required for the following operations.
pressed in. system is now open.

The braking
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always 18 3
use a socket wrench.
Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system. 19
34- The second technician removes the safety bolt (1).

The braking system jaws are now free to move.
35- When the second technician gives the order, the first
technician releases the push-button (11). 20 4
36- Tighten the silencer (10).
1-006093-02-xx.svg
37- Position the safety bolt (1) in the fixing lug on the braking
system.
For machines fitted with several brake cylinders, repeat

as above from step 7 until you have replaced all of the
friction pads (3 ; 4).
F Make sure that the brake disc is clean (19)
· Clean the disc (19) if necessary, see
procedure "BNM-009.
"BNM-009.
38- Fit the covers (8 ; 9) with the screws (7).
39- Position the cover plate (6).
40- Tighen up the fixing bolts on the cover plate (6).
"BSU-003.. 1
BEFORE YOU FINISH

10
42- Check the gap between the friction pads (3 ; 4) and the
brake disc (19), see procedure "BNM-009.
"BNM-009. 1-006262-01-xx.svg
43- Press the button (11) several times to make sure that the
brake is working
working properly.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: braking system friction pads DM-033 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-034 Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer 1
MACHINE STATUS
-
primary electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
1-006030-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- silencer cartridge and brake bolts.
Consumables
-
teflon tape.
Specific tools
- silencer wrench (1),
- 3/8" socket wrench 3/8" (supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working 10
"BCU-013.
3- Remove the exhaust silencer (2) using the silencer
wrench (1).
4- Remove the brake bolts (3) using the hexagonal wrench 1
3/8".
5- Remove the support (4).
6- Remove the used teflon tape (5) from the support.
7- Removed the silencer cartridge (6).
1-006315-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: exhaust system silencer DM-034 2/2
Refit
2
8- Clean using a clean, dry cloth:
the body (7),
the supports (4 ; 8), 4
the grill (9).
9- Fit the new silencer cartridge (6) into the body (7).
10- Assemble the grill (4 ; 8) the supports *2 and the body
(7).
11- Tighten the new brake bolts (3) using the socket wrench
3/8".
12- Apply the teflon tape (5) on the threaded part of the
support (4).
3 5
1-006316-01-xx.svg
13- Clean the tapping on the solenoid valve assemblies

6 7
"TORNADO"(10).
14- Fit and lightly tighten the exhaust silencer (2) using the
silencer wrench (1). 4 8
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
3 9
1-006317-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-035 Removal/refit: mold base safety pin 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always identify the cause of the safety pin breakage

breakage
before replacing it.
Replace the broken safety pin (1) by 1 original SIDEL

part.
Never tighten or loosen the bolt (4) as you may weaken

the safety pin (1).
1-006030-37-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
-
main electrical circuit under
under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- PCC switched
switched on, see procedure "BCU-004
"BCU-004,, 5
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- safety pin (1). 2 3 1 4
Consumables
- normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243". 1-006585-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Bring the mold support unit around
around to your working
-013. 1
The bolt (2) should be fitted with normal threadlock

"LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty loosening the
bolt (2).
3- Remove the bolt (2) and the washer (3).
4- Remove the safety pin (1).
Refit 1-006584-01-xx.svg
5- Fit the new safety pin (1) by positioning the flat part of the
pin against the raised section on the mold base support
(5).
L
E Fit the bolt (2) using normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: mold base safety pin DM-035 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-036 Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For an intevention on several blow stations, use manual

rotation (and not the JOG) in order to protect the low-
pressure air circuit.
Replace the faulty distributer with an identical one to

prevent further malfunction.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- PCC application set to "Settings", 2
- "BCU-013,,
JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013 1
8
"BCU-005.
7
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- set of seals,
- distributor(s)
distributor(s) (1 ; 2).
Consumables
- 1-010696-01-xx.svg
Clean, dry cloths,
- "LUB A16" grease.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
4
7
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
5
"BCU-012.
1
machine. 3
4- Remove the electrical connectors (4). 1-010465-02-xx.svg

L
E The seals (6) may fall into the machine.
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit:
emoval/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer DM-036 2/2
6- Remove the nozzle control distributer (1).

7- Remove the nozzle control distributer (2).
8- Remove the o-ring seals (6).
Refit
11- Grease the o-ring seals (6) using a cloth and "LUB A16" 8 3
grease.
2
5
1-010697-01-xx.svg
12- Position the o-ring seals (6).

13- Position the nozzle control distributer (1). 5
14- Position the nozzle control distributer (2).

Observe the correspondence between the electrical
connectors (4) and the distributors (1 ; 2).
16- Connect the electrical connectors (4).
1;2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6
19- Control the performance of the nozzle cyclinder (4), see
procedure "BPU-006.
"BPU-006.
1-010466-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-037 Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace the springs (4) in pairs to avoid stress

on the guide system.
Never attempt any work on the thrust (10).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 1-006030-37-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- springs (5),
- upper and lower
lower supports (6 ; 7) as required according to
their condition.
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1
-013. 4
3- Hold the mold base in the raised position.
9
4- Hold the nut (1).
5- Unscrew and remove the spring guide guid e (2) using an 6
appropriate tool using the slot (3).
5
6- Remove the nut (1) and the washer
washer (4).
7- Remove the
the following parts: 7
spring (5) with the upper support (6),
lower support (7). 3
8- Repeat as above, from step 4 to remove the second
spring (5). 2
Refit
8 10
9- Clean the contact surfaces on the console (8 ; 9) using a
clean, dry cloth.
1-006387-02-xx.svg
L 10- Position the upper support (6) in the spring (5).
E
D
I 11- Position the lower support (7) in the console (8).
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: mold base console assembly springs DM-037 2/2
12- Fit the spring (5) with the upper support (6) on the lower
support (7) and the console (9).
13- Position the nut (1) and the washer (4).
14- Hold the nut (1).
15- Screw in and tighten the spring guide (2) using the
appropriate tool in the slot (3).
16- Repeat as above from step 9 to fit the second spring (5).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
17- Make sure that the mold base assembly functions

correctly.
"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-039 Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt 2
MACHINE STATUS
-
primary electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
PROCEDURE
1-006030-31-xx.svg
Removal
1- Remove the cover (1) using the fixing bolts .
2- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) manually and remove the
belt (2). 1
Refit
3- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) and fit the belt (2).
F Make sure that the belt (2) is lined up on the tensioner
roller (4) on each pulley (5 ; 6).
4- Fit the cover (1) and secure it (1).
1-006509-01-xx.svg
6 2
1-006508-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt DM-039 2/2

"BCU-003..
8- Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (9).
1-010353-13-02.svg

A
The unscrambler rollers are functioning.
F Make sure that the unscrambler rollers (9) rotate
properly.
The unscrambler rollers are stopped.
1-010351-04-02.svg
11 10
1-006375-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-040 Removal/refit: conveyor belts 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
3 conveyor belts are fitted on the preform feeder:
-
1 under the hopper , except on the mini-hopper option ,
- 1 under the unscrambler rollers (1),
- 1 under the elevator column (5).
The is no belt in the mini-hopper . The mini-hopper is

fitted with a recovery conveyor (9).
1-007021-08-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-017,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
1
PROCEDURE
Removal/ref it: unscrambler roller recovery belt (1) and mini-

Removal/refit:
hopper recovery conveyor (9) (option)
1-006107-02-xx.svg
1- Open the cover manually (2) to access the belt (1) using
the quick-change fittings.
· If necessary, bring the belt (1) around by pulling it
gently until you can access the clasps (3).
2- Loosen the belt (1), see procedure "BRM-015
"BRM-015..
3- Carefully remove the holding rod (4).
The clasps come free (3).
1-006673-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: conveyor belts DM-040 2/4
4- Staple the new belt (1) to the

th e end of the belt to be removed
using the holding rod (4).
5- Carefully pull the old belt (1) by its free end bring the new
belt in fully.
6- Unhook the two belts (1). 2
1-006567-01-xx.svg
7- Hook up the 2 ends of the new belt (1) using the holding
rod (4).
8- Close the cover (2) manually.
Removal/refit:
Removal/re fit: the slatted elevator belt (5)
The removal/refit of the slatted elevator belt (5) is 3

identical for the mini-hopper option.
9- Open the safety cover (6) to access the belt (5).
· If necessary, bring the belt (5) around by pulling it 4
gently until you can access the clasps (3).
You may need to remove the panel (6) to make the
operation easier.
1-007299-01-xx.svg
10- Loosen the belt (5), see procedure

procedure "BRM-015.
"BRM-015.
5
12- Staple the new belt (5) to the
th e end of the belt to be removed
using the holding rod (4).
13- Carefully pull the old belt (5) by its free end bring the new
belt in fully.
14- Unhook the two belts (5).
rod (4).
1-006568-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-040 Removal/refit: conveyor belts 2
16- Close the cover panel (6).

Removal/refit: hopper and displaced hopper (option)
conveyor belt (10)
17- Open the clearance gate (8) to access the belt (10).
· If necessary, bring the belt (10) around by pulling it
gently until you can access the clasps (3). 5
18- Loosen the belt (10), see procedure "BRM-015
"BRM-015..
20- Staple the new belt (10) to the end of the belt to be
removed using the holding rod (4). 6
1-006547-02-xx.svg
21- Carefully pull the

t he old belt (10) by its free end bring the new
belt in fully.
22- Unhook the two belts (10).
rod (4).
24- Close the clearance gate (8) manually.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
25- Set the conveyor belts, see procedure "BRM-015

"BRM-015..
10 8
1-006694-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: conveyor belts DM-040 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BDM-043 Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
To make interventions easier, T-connectors (not

supplied) should be installed on thermoregulator
outlets.

equipment..
Never attempt to operate the machine without water in

The hydraulic circuit of the mold shells is supplied with 1-006030-66-xx.svg
oil.
The hydraulic circuit of the mold supports is supplied

with water.
MACHINE STATUS
- thermoregulator - cold.
procedure "BCU-005,
"BCU-005,
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
"BCU-004..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 38" oil.
oil.
Specific tools
- large tank,
- drum with approx. 200 L capacity.
PROCEDURE
Hydraulic circuit of the mold shells

Drainage
1- Close the distribution circuit valves on the
thermoregulator.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
raining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit DM-043 2/6

4- Place the large tank under the T-connectors .
5- Remove the plug from the supply circuit T-connector . 1

6- Connect a low-pressure air supply hose to the T-
connector .
7- Remove the plug from the return circuit T-connector .
8- Connect an adapted hose to the T-connector .
9- Position the other end of the hose in the empty drum.
10- Turn on the low pressure air circuit.
F Wait until all of the oil has drained off.
11- Switch off the low pressure air supply.
12- Disconnect the hoses
hoses .
13- Install the plugs on the T-connectors .
14- If necessary, clean the assembly using a clean, dry cloth.
The hydraulic circuit of the mold shells has been
drained. Work can now be carried out on the circuit.
1-007969-03-xx.svg
Filling
Before filling the hydraulic circuit:

- clean or replace the external hydraulic module
filters, see procedure "BDM-007
"BDM-007,,
- drain the termoregulator.
F Verify that the valves (1) are open.
15- Open the distribution circuit valves on the
thermoregulator.
16- Fill the circuit with "LUB 38" oil via the thermoregulator.
thermoregulator.
The mold body distribution circuit fills up.
F Check the oil level on the thermoregulator.
· If necessary, top up the oil.
18- Purge the air in the circuit at the thermoregula
thermoregulator.
tor.
F Wait until the circuit has been com pletely
pletely purged.
Dispose of the contents of the drum and the tank in
accordance with applicable legislation.
Hydraulic circuit of the shell supports
Drainage
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
20- Close the distribution circuit valves on the

thermoregulator.
machine.
22- Close the valves (1 ; 2).
23- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the 1
specially designed hoses.
24- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4).
25- Close the safety doors. 2
1-007351-03-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24

The mold body water circuit is open.
machine.
30- Disconnect the drain valve (3).
31- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose.
5 6
1-010353-09-02.svg

A
34- Disconnect the drain valve (3). 7
The hydraulic circuit of the shell supports has been
drained. Work can now be carried out on the circuit.
Filling
The mold body water circuit is open. 1-010348-06-02.svg

machine.
39- Close the drain valve (3).
F Make sure that the drain valve (4) iis
s open.
40- Open the distribution circuit valves on the
thermoregulator.
41- Open the valve (2) by a 1/3.
42- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve
(4).
43- Open the valve (2) fully.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
F Check for leaks. ID
S
©
SBO 20/24

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-045 Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

machine.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
Parts
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
3
machine.
1
2- Remove the counter-nut (2).
3- Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the 2
support (3).
Refit
5- Fit the new absorber (1) in the support (3) to obtain the X
gap X = 10 mm between the body of the
th e absorber (1) and
the thrust (4). 4
6- Tighten the lock-nut (2).
7- Make sure that the mislock detection system functions
correctly, see procedure "BNM-004 . 1-006573-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber DM-045 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-046 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel 1
MACHINE STATUS
- no bottles in the bottle outfeed,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guides, see
procedure "BDM-048.
"BDM-048.
3- Remove the bottle outfeed body guides, see
procedure "BDM-049.
"BDM-049.
4- Remove the
the castle nut (1).
5- Remove the bottle outfeed wheel (2).
Refit
6- Clean the bottle outfeed wheel (2) using a clean dry cloth.
7- Position the bottle outfeed wheel (2).
1
8- Tighten the lock nut (1).
9- Fit the bottle outfeed body guides, see
procedure "BDM-049
"BDM-049..
10- Fit the bottle outfeed neck guides, see
procedure "BDM-048
"BDM-048..
BEFORE YOU FINISH 2

1-006576-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel DM-046 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-047 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
F Make sure that the transfer arm is not above the
retractable guide.
guid e.
· If necessary, rotate the machine or remove the
"BDM-024..
obstructing transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-024
2- Remove the bolt (2).
1
3- Remove the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1).
Refit
3
4- Clean the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1) and the
Position the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1) using
the guide studs.
2
5- Fit the bottle outfeed retratcable guide (1) on its support
(3).
F Make sure that the bottle outfeed retractable guide is
securely fitted (1).
· If necessary, fit the transfer arm head, see
procedure "BDM-024.
"BDM-024.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006577-01-xx.svg

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide DM-047 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-048 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Loosen the cross-nuts (1 ; 2).
3 1 4 2
3- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guides (3) and the
supports (4).
If necessary, before refitting, change the bottle outfeed
"BDM-049..
body guides, see procedure "BDM-049
Refit
4- Clean the columns (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
5- Clean the supports (4) and the bottle outfeed neck guides
The supports (4) must be resting on the column
flangings (5).
6- Position the bottle outfeed neck guide (3)/support (4) 5
assembly on the columns (5).
1-006578-01-xx.svg
8- Make sure that the bottle outfeed neck guides (3) are
securely fitted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides DM-048 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-049 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides 1
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the locking nuts (1 ; 2).
3
3- Remove the bottle outfeed body guides (3) and the
supports (4).
Refit
4- Clean the columns (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
5- Clean the supports (4) and the bottle outfeed
outf eed body guides
6- Position the bottle outfeed body guides (3) and the
supports (4).
8- Make sure that the bottle outfeed body guides (3) are
securely fitted. 1 5 4 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006578-02-xx.svg

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides DM-049 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-050 Removal/refit: se

seal a
an
nd co
compensation sp
springs (h
(holding th
thrust ba
bar) ((H
HR) 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

- Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BDM-016".
- Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BDM-050".

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
Do not damage the mold shells.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS A B
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
1-007335-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- 1 compensation seal (8),
- 96 elastic rings (5).
Consumables
- cleaning agent "Net A04".
Specific tools
- 2 slings (9)
(9) supplied with the set of molds.
PROCEDURE
Removal
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) DM-050 2/4

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 10

-013.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
7
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
5- Remove the mold base , see procedure "BDM-011
"BDM-011..
6- Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the left shell support
1-006318-03-xx.svg
7- Remove the nuts (2) and the washers (3).

6 3 2
8- Remove the external boxes (4). X

10- Remove the inner boxes (6). 4
11- Remove the left half-shell support (1) from the support
block (7).
12- Remove the compensation seal (8).
Refit 5
Never apply grease when fitting the compensation seal

(8).
13- Remove the grease from the left half-shell support (1) and 2
the left support block (7) using a cloth dipped in cleaning
agent "NET A04".
2
14- Position the new seal (8) on the left half-shell support
(1).
15- Position the slings (9) to hold the seal (8) on the left half
shell support (1).
16- Position the left half-shell support (1) in the left support 7
block (7).
1-007317-01-xx.svg
17- Position the inner boxes (6).
19- Position the outer boxes (4).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-050 Removal/refit: se

seal a
an
nd co
compensation sp
springs (h
(holding th
thrust ba
bar) ((H
HR) 3

22- Remove the slings (9). 8

24- Reconnect the hydraulic lines to the left shell support
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
If there is any resistance when closing
closin g the mold support
unit adjust the compensation system, see 1-006320-01-xx.svg
procedure "BRM-023.
"BRM-023.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
28- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have replaced all
9 8
of the compensation seals and rings.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
29- Re-adjust the compensation system, see

procedure "BRM-023
"BRM-023..
position using the JOG system. 1
31- Repeat as above from step 29 until you have set up all of
the mold suport units.
Disconnect
32- The the is
procedure JOG,
nowsee procedure "BCU -013.
complete. -013.
1-006458-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) DM-050 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-063 Removal / fitting a TORNADO solenoid valve 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
During
solenoidthe warranty
valve period
assembly only
may be the "TORNADO"
replaced.
The "TORNADO" exhaust solenoid valve and its

location are fitted with guides to prevent any inversion
of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves.
Never invert the pilots (upper part) of the "TORNADO"

solenoid valves. The pilots of the "TORNADO" solenoid
valves are specific to their operation.
1-006030-01-xx.svg

Follow the hygiene precautions. 4

5
2
Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the 2
"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle
cylinder. 10
MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 1
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical
electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
Parts
- "TORNADO" solenoid valve (7).
Consumables
- Methylated spirit,
- "LUB a15" grease.
Specific tools
- 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / fitting a TORNADO solenoid valve DM-063 2/2

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 6 6

"BCU-013.
"BCU-012. 6
3- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026.
"BDM-026.
(1 ).
5- Disassemble the electrical connections (10) from the coils
(2).
7
6- Remove the union (3).
7- Disconnect the hoses (4 ; 5). 7
8- Remove the bolts (6). 3
8
9- Remove the solenoid valves (7).
9
Refit
10- Clean the seatings (8) of the solenoid valves using a cloth
steeped in denaturated alcohol.
F Control the state of the seating surfaces (8) of the
solenoid valves.
1-007423-01-xx.svg
If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002.
"BDM-002.
11- Grease the o-ring seals (9) using a cloth and "LUB A15"
grease.
12- Position the new solenoid valves (7).
14- Tighten the connector (3).
8
15- Reconnect the hoses (4 ; 5).
Always follow the references
references when connecting the
electrical connectors to the corresponding solenoid
valve functions.
The electrical connector references (10) commence

with:
- "PB" for the preblow solenoid.
- "E" for the exhaust solenoid. 1-007422-01-xx.svg
- "B" for the blowing solenoid.
Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors

(10).
16- Fit the electrical connections to the coils (2).
17- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026.
"BDM-026.
"BCU-013.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle

cylinder , see procedure "BPU-006.
"BPU-006.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-069 Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Work to the
fitted on be carried
machineout
andat always
height:follow
use the equipment
current safety
regulations.

machine.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-18-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
Consumables
None
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refitting
emoval/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber DM-069 2/2
Removal
5 4 1 2 6
Activate the low-pressu
low-pressure
re air in the set-up window of the
"BCU-013..
JOG, see procedure "BCU-013
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Bring the stretching cylinder (2) onto the horizontal part
of the stretching cam (3) using the JOG system.
3- Loosen the check-nut (4).
4- Loosen the screw (5).
5- Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the
support (6).
Refit
X
"J" represents the gap between
betwe en the cam follower (8) and
the stretching cam (3). J
F Check whether the gap (J) is J = 0,2 ±0,1 mm .

If yes.
If not. 8 7 3 9
· Adjust the height of the stretching slide (7), see
procedure "BDM-014.
"BDM-014. 1-007314-01-xx.svg
6- Fit the new absorber (1) in the support (6) to obtain the
gap X = 8,2 +0,4/0 mm between the body of the absorber
(1) and the thrust (9).
7- Tighten up the screw (5).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-072 Removal/refitting of the TORNADO solenoid valve flow rate limiters 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
1-006030-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- flow rate limiter (6).
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease.
Specific tools
- 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal

procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working 1 3 4 8
"BCU-013.

"BCU-012.
4- Remove the knob (2).
5- Loosen the bolt (3) but do not remove it.
6- Remove the position indicator (4).
8- Remove the flow rate limiter (6).
2 10
1-007425-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/refitting
emoval/refitting of the TORNADO solenoid valve flow rate limiters DM-072 2/2
Refit
9- Clean the axle (7) of the new flow rate limiter (6) using a
clean, dry cloth.
10- Clean the bore of the distribution block (8) using a clean,
dry cloth.
F Check the condition of the distribution block bore (8). 9 7
If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002.
"BDM-002.
4
1-007424-01-xx.svg
11- Lubricate the distribution block bore (8) using "LUB

A15" grease.
grease.
12- Fit the new flow rate limiter (6).
14- Fit the position indicator (4) using the positioning pin (9).
15- Turn the position indicator (4) knob (10) to the "0,00"
value. 6
17- Fit the knob (2). 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Check the pre-blow flow rate setting, see
procedure "BPU-013.
"BPU-013.
The procedure is now complete. 7 8
1-007426-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-075 Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attemptcircuits.
the hydraulic to operate the machine without water in
MACHINE STATUS
- thermoregulator - cold.
procedure "BCU-005,
"BCU-005,
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 1-006030-03-xx.svg

"BCU-004..
PROCEDURE
Drainage
machine.
3- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the 2
specially designed hoses.
4- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4).
4
3
L
E
D
I 1-007351-02-xx.svg
S
©
SBO 20/24
raining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) DM-075 2/2

machine.

11- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose.
5 6
1-010353-09-02.svg
The drainage is now complete. Work can now be

A
carried out on the circuit.
Filling
machine.
19- Close the drain valve (3).
F Make sure that the drain valve (4) iis
s open.
21- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve
(4). 1-010348-07-02.svg
22- Open the valve (1) fully.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDM-076 Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attemptcircuits.
the hydraulic to operate the machine without water in
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-005,
"BCU-005,
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 1-006030-03-xx.svg

"BCU-004..
PROCEDURE
Drainage
1-007351-08-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
raining of the hydraulic system of the oven DM-076 2/4
1- Close the oven water circuit general inlet.

machine.
4- Disconnect the water supply hoses from the connectors
(3 ; 4).
5- Connect the connector (4) to a sewer drain using an
appropriate hose.
6- Connect a low-pressure air supply hose to the T-
connector (3).
4 3
1-007485-02-xx.svg

The oven water circuit is open.
machine.
12- Open the valves (1 ; 2)
F Verify that valve (8) is open.
15- Disconnect the hoses
hoses .
5 6
1-010353-09-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BDM-076 Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven 2

The oven water circuit is closed. A
The drainage is now complete.
7
Work can now be carried out on the circuit.
Filling
machine.
19- Connect connector (3) to the water supply circuit.
21- Open the over water circuit general inlet.
22- Close the safety doors. 1-010348-08-02.svg
The oven water circuit is open.
machine.
25- As soon as water
water flows out, close valve (2).
26- Connect the connector (4) to the water return circuit.
27- Open the valves (1 ; 2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The oven water circuit is closed.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
raining of the hydraulic system of the oven DM-076 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BDM-095 Reconditioning the oven spindles 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Carry out on
depending part
the or all ofmaintenance
required the following procedure
operation.
Fully reconditioning the spindles at 6 000 h is carried

out once only. for the second operation, contact
SIDEL to carry out a diagnostic on the general condition
of the spindle chain.
Visually identifying the type of spindles :
- Spindle (A), shaft and cylindrical support ring.
1-006030-21-xx.svg
- Spindle (B), shaft and flattened support ring.
The maintenance schedule varies according to the type

of spindle.
Type Frequency
Spindle (A) 2 000 h / 6 000 h

Spindle (B) 6 000 h
The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets

designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the
spindle tip pointing downwards.
A B
1-010327-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 9 14 18 12 10 15
- oven cold.
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- spring (4),
- support ring (5), 1-010306-01-xx.svg
- bushings (11 ; 13),

- elastic rings (2).
Consumables
L
- cleaning agent NET A03.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning the oven spindles DM-095 2/6
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush,
- outer elastic ring grip,
-
bushing removal tool (9),
- expansible extractor (10),
- slide hammer (12),
- Ø12,9 mm drift (14),
- plastic mallet (15),
- Ø12 mm drift (18).
PROCEDURE
Replacing the spring and the support ring

1 3 2 4 6
Use a workbench when reconditioning the spindle
chain.
Removal

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle up to your
working position, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3- Remove the spindle tip (1), see procedure "BDM-012.
"BDM-012.
5- Remove the bayonet ring (3), spring (4) and support ring
(5).
6- Disassemble the various parts (3 ; 4 ; 5).
1-010305-01-xx.svg
Refit
Never grease the shaft (6), as it is lubricated by the self-

lubricating bushings.
7- Clean the bayonet ring (3) and the shaft (6) using a clean,
dry cloth.
For (B) type spindles, position the support ring (5)
according to the flat sections on the shaft (6).
8- Position the new support ring (5) on the shaft (6).
9- Position the new ring (4).
5 4 3
10- Position the bayonet ring (3).
1-010304-01-xx.svg
12- Fit the spindle tip, see procedure "BDM-012
"BDM-012..
13- If necessary, repeat as above from step 22 until you have
replaced all of the springs and rings.
Replacing the sleeve bushings
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
For this operation, you can remove the spindle chain in 8

sections of 10 links.
Removal 13
14- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle fitted with an
upper sprocket up to your working position, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 7 17
15- Remove the link(s) (7) from the spindle chain, see
procedure "BDM-010.
"BDM-010.
16- Remove all of the sleeves (8) from the link(s) (7)
concerned.
17- Position the bushing removal tool (9) in the vice.
16 11
1-006193-02-xx.svg
18- Position the expansible extractor (10) under the bushing

10
(11) on the sleeve (8).
19- Position the expansible extractor (10)/sleeve (8)

assembly in the tool (9).
20- Fit the slide hammer (12) along with the expansible
extractor (10)/sleeve (8) assembly.
21- Remove the bushing (11) from the sleeve (8) using the
slide hammer (12). 11
1-010307-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
22- Remove the slide hammer (12) from the expansible

extractor (10). 12
23- Turn the sleeve over (8).
10
1-010308-01-xx.svg
24- Remove the second bush (13) using the Ø12,9 mm drift
(14) and the plastic mallet (15).
25- Repeat as above from step 18 until you you have removed
all of the bushings (11 ; 13) from all of the sleeves (8). 14
Cleaning
Never clean parts from the spindle chain by soaking

them.
8
Never use excessive amounts of solvent in order to
preserve the lubrication on the bearings.
26- Clean the parts (7 ; 8 ; 16 ; 17) using a brush, a cloth and
the cleaning agent "NET A03". 9
Refit
27- Position the sleeve (8) in the bush removal tool (9).
28- Position the new bush
bus h (11) in the sleeve (8) using the Ø12
mm drift (18) and the plastic mallet (15). 1-010332-01-xx.svg
29- Turn the sleeve over (8).
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
30- Position the second bush (13) in the sleeve (8) using the
Ø12 mm drift (18) and the plastic mallet (15). 8
31- Repeat as above from step 27 until you have positioned
bushes (11 ; 13) in all of the sleeves (8).

32- Assemble the link(s) (7),
(7), see procedure "BDM-010.
"BDM-010.
11
33- Fit the link(s) (7) on the spindle chain, see
procedure "BDM-010.
"BDM-010.
F Check that the sprockets (16) engage on the spindle drive
chain.
34- Repeat as above from step 14 until you have replaced
13
all of the bushes (11 ; 13) in the
t he sleeves (8) on the spindl
spindlee
chain.
9
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
36- Sign off the operation on the machine's worksheet.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-098 Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
A full reconditioning
reconditioning of the nozzle cylinder distributer
must be carried out at 6 000 h. At 12 000 h, the nozzle
cylinder distributer must be replaced.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
The components (1 ; 2 ; 3) must be fitted correctly to A

avoid serious malfunctions.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- nozzle cylinder distributer removed, see
procedure "BDM-036.
"BDM-036.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- reconditioning kit (A).
Consumables
1-010569-01-xx.svg
- light "LOCTITE 242" threadlock.
Specific tools
-
Clean, dry brush.

PROCEDURE

5 6 12 11 10 9 7
2- Remove the
the solenoid valve (1).
3- Remove the end-plate (2).
4- Remove the seals (5 ; 6).
5- Clean the components using a clean dry cloth.
6- Position the seals (5 ; 6).
7- Fit the plate (2) and the solenoid valve (1).
threadlock.
10- Remove the end-plate (8).
11- Remove the shock absorber (9). 4 1 2 3 8
L 13- Clean the components using a clean dry cloth. 1-010570-01-xx.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
econditioning
econditioning nozzle cylinder distributer DM-098 2/2
14- Position the seal (10) and the shock absorber (9) in the
plate (8).
15- Remove the spring (11).
Use the orifices in the body (3) to extract the drawer
(12).
16- Remove the tray (12).
Fit the drawer (12) in the correct direction so that you
can insert the spring (11) into the drawer.
17- Fit the tray (12).
18- Insert the spring (11).
19- Refit the plate (8).
threadlock.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
21- Fit the nozzle cylinder distributer , see

procedure "BDM-036.
"BDM-036.
F Check that the nozzle cylnder distributer functions
properly when the m achine starts.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-106 Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve 3
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-006,,
- PCC application (not) in Setting mode.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- 2 silencers (1).
Consumables
None
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

"BCU-013. 1

machine.
3- Unscrew and remove the silencers (1).
1-010742-01-xx.svg
Refit
4- Fit and tighten the silencers (1).
5- Repeat as above, from step 1 until you have replaced all
of the silencers (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1
1-010738-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve DM-106 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDM-107 Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
For an intevention on several blow stations, use manual

rotation (and not the JOG) in order to protect the low-
pressure air circuit.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 5 8 6

"BCU-006,,
- PCC application (not) in Setting mode.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 2 4

Parts
- (7) solenoid valve .
Consumables
- Clean, dry cloths. 7 3
Specific tools
1-010738-02-xx.svg
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
"BCU-012.
machine.
4- Remove the electrical connector (2).
5- Disconnect the hoses (3 ; 4).
9 10 8 6
8- Hold the solenoid (7) and remove the screws (8).
9- Unscrew and remove the silencers (9).
L 1-010739-01-xx.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid DM-107 2/2
Refit
F Check the condition and the
the position of the seals (12).
12- Fit and tighten the connector (10).
13- Fit and tighten the silencers (9).
14- Position the solenoid (7) on the holes (13) on the support
(11).
15- Hold the solenoid (7) and tighten the screws (8). 9 10 12 6
1-010740-01-xx.svg
16- Position the connector (6).

8
18- Reconnect the hoses (3 ; 4).
F Mak e sure that the seal (14) is in position on the electrical 13
connector (2).
19- Connect the electrical connector (2).

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Adjustment procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting the mold opening/closing lever ..................................................................................................... BRM-001
Setting the heights of the transfer arms ..........................................
........................................................................................
.........................................................
........... BRM-002
Setting the tension of the spindle chains .................................................................................................. BRM-003
Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven .................................................................................................... BRM-004
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer .......................................................................................
.................................................................................... ... BRM-005
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer ..............................................................

...................................................................................................
..................................... BRM-006
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds ................................................................................................ BRM-007
Setting the tensions on the timing belts .................................................................................................... BRM-008
Setting the stretching bottom thrust .......................................................................................................... BRM-009
Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields ........................................................................................ BRM-010
Setting the infeed rail .........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
....... BRM-011
Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads ..............................
..............................................................
...........................................
........... BRM-012
Setting the unscrambler roller assembly ..............................................................
..................................................................................................
.................................... BRM-013
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts ............................................................................................... BRM-015
Setting the height of the unscrambler unit ................................................................................................ BRM-016
Setting up the stabilization rail assembly .........................................
.......................................................................................
........................................................
.......... BRM-017
Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer .......................................................................................
.................................................................................... ... BRM-018
Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) ........................................................................ BRM-021
Setting the bottle base outfeed guide ....................................................................................................... BRM-022
Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) ........................................................................
.................................... .................................... BRM-023
Setting the stretching cylinder rollers ...........................................
............................................................................................
............................................................
........... BRM-044
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure
1/4 BRM-001 Setting the mold opening/closing lever 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

If the same opening/closing lever is regularly mis-

adjusted, do not tighten to the highest torque rather
check that the shaft and the various assembled parts
are correctly greased.
This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians.
1-006030-37-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 5

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
1
"BCU-005,, 3
- "BCU-005..
hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 2
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- set of thickness
thickness gauges ,
PROCEDURE
1-008393-01-xx.svg

machine.
2- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2).
3- Install the cam (3) in the upper part of the support (2).
4- Bolt the button (1).

5- Bring into position the lever (7) to be adjusted on the cam
(3) using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014
"BCU-014..
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure Part C
etting the mold opening/closing lever RM-001 2/4
Check that the station to be adjusted is in closed

position and locked out.
Warning - risk of burns.
6- Advance the roller (4) until opposite the mark (5) of the
cam (3) using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
7- Loosen the bolts on the expanding assembler (6)
crosswise but do not remove them.
In normal use the components of the expanding 7 9
assembler (6) come apart when the bolts are
unscrewed.. If you have any difficulty releasing the parts
unscrewed
of the assembler (6) use the bolts M10 and the tappings
M10 located at the position of the white bolts (9).
8- Position the roller (4) into contact with the cam (3) and
align with mark (5).
F Make sure tht h at the roller (4) rolls freely.
F Control play X < 0.05 mm between the roller ((4)4) and the
cam (3).
F Check the gap Y = 0.05 mm between the connecting rod
(7) and the con sole (8).
9- Tighten up the bolts on the expanding assembler (6)
crosswise to a torque of 3,2 daN.m.
Tighten in crosswise fashion the bolts of the expanding
assembler (6) in the order indicated in the illustration
(A).
6
1-006671-02-xx.svg
Tightening up the expanding assembler (6) can modify

the gaps X and Y. A
F Check that the follower (4) rolls freely.
F Check the gaps X and Y again.
· If the gaps X and/or Y exceed tolerances go to step
7.
12 1
F Make sure that the bolts on the expanding assembler
8
(6) are not raised above the inner surface of the
5
connecting rod (7). 4
10- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2). 9
10
3
6
7
2
11
1-006671-03-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-001 Setting the mold opening/closing lever 2
11- Install the cam (3) in the lower part of the support (2).
8 X
12- Bolt the button (1).
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
· If the mold support unit is difficult to open reset the Y
gap Y.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

7 6 4 3
1-008390-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the mold opening/closing lever RM-001 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-002 Setting the heights of the transfer arms 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

A B
C
The reference transfer arm on a wheel is stamped with
the lowest number.
A bottle transfer
transfer arm inspection
inspection is carried
carried out in (A).
(A).
1-006030-36-xx.svg
A preform transfer
transfer arm inspection is carried
carried out in (B).
MACHINE STATUS
-
molds at production temperature,

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 14
- "BCU-005,,
low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005 13
- "BCU-005..
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
None
Specific tools
- dummy grip tooling (1),
- grip height tool (2),
grip height tool (2),
- comparator (3) and column,
- guide pin (4).
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
L Wear heat protection gloves.

E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the heights of the transfer arms RM-002 2/4
Checking the height of the reference transfer arm

2
2- Remove the nozzle tip from the blowing station
corresponding to the reference transfer arm, see
procedure "BDM-025.
"BDM-025.
3- Remove the mold support unit corresponding to the
reference transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-011.
"BDM-011.
4- Remove the pair of grips (5) from the reference transfer
arm , see procedure "BDM-024
"BDM-024..
5- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the reference transfer
tr ansfer arm using
the 2 bolts (6 ; 7).
8
1-006521-01-xx.svg
6- Position the grip height tooling (2) on the shell support

(8) for the mold support unit corresponding to the
reference transfer arm.
For the preform transfer arm.
· Position the speed follower (9) at the marker
"FIN" engraved on the cam using the JOG
system, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip
height tool (2).
For a bottle transfer arm.
· Position the speed follower (9) at the marker 14
"DEBUT" engraved on the cam using the JOG
system, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
13
The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip
height tool (2).
3
4 5
1-010329-01-xx.svg
F Check the gap X betw
between
een the 2 tools across the length
of the dumm y grip (1) using a set of thickness gauges. 10 11
If the gap is correct.
· Refit the pair of transfer grips, see
procedure "BDM-024.
"BDM-024.
If the gap is not correct.
· Adjust the heigh
heightt of the transfer arm .
Transfer arm Preforms (mm) Transfer arm Bottles (mm)
X = 1 ±0,05 X = 0,7 ±0,05
Setting the height of the reference transfer arm

7- Loosen the counter-nut (10) but do not remove it. X
8- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) to obtain the
measurement "X".
The height of the transfer arm is set.
10- Remove the grip height tool (2). 2 1 14 12
11- Remove the 2 bolts (6 ; 7).
1-010259-01-xx.svg
L
12- Remove the dummy grip (1). E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-002 Setting the heights of the transfer arms 3
F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on the

cam races (13).
If they are not centered.
·
Set the position
procedure of the followers
"BDM-038. , see
13- Refit the pair of transfer

t ransfer grips, see procedure "BDM-024.
"BDM-024.
Checking the other transfer arms
10 11
14- Position the reference transfer arms (14) to (C) using the
JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
15- Position the pin (4) in the
th e grip (5)
(5) on the reference transfer
arm (14).
16- Fit the comparator (3) and the column above the
reference transfer arm (14).
17- Position the sensor on the comparator (3) on the pin (4). 14
18- Position the needle on the comparator (3) on "0".
The comparator (3) must not move.
19- Fit the pin (4) in the transfer arm you wish to check. 7
20- Position the transfer arm under the comparator (3) using
the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013.. 5
F Check the positi
position
on of the needle.
If the needle is not at "0".
· Adjust the height
height of the transfer
transfer arm . 6 12 9
If the pin is on "0".
· Repeat the previous steps, from step 14 until all 1-010324-01-xx.svg
the transfer arms have been checked.

Setting the other transfer arms
"BCU-036.
22- Loosen the counter-nut (10) but do not
n ot remove it.
23- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) so that the needle on the
comparator (3) is at "0".
The transfer arm is at the same height as the reference
transfer arm.
The height of the transfer arm is set.
F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on the
cam races (13).
If they are not centered.
· Set the position of the followers , see
procedure "BDM-038.
If centring is correct.
· Repeat the previous steps, from step 14 until all
the transfer arms have been checked.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-036.
26- Fit the nozzle tip , see procedure "BDM-025
"BDM-025..
27- Fit the mold on the th e mold support unit, see
procedure "BDM-011.
"BDM-011.
"BCU-013.
L The procedure is now complete.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the heights of the transfer arms RM-002 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-003 Setting the tension of the spindle chains 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The tension of the spindle chain needs to be set

correctly in order for the preforms to be conveyed
correctly through the oven.
The spindle chain tension is determined by the

compression of the spring (1) on the notched wheel
(3) plate (2).
1-006030-21-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 3
"BCU-005..
PROCEDURE
1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the 4 1 2

machine.
2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see 1-006525-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
3- Tighten or loosen the nut (4).
The length of the washer and spring (1) assembly is 250
±30 mm.
Use a pin spuller in the holes on the nut (4) to set the 1
tension on the spring (1) more easily.
F Check the settings for the oven spindle rotation
chains, see procedure BRM- 032.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
4- Rotate the
the machine using
using the JOG, see
procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
F Make sure that the spindle chain functions correctly.
"BCU-013. 4
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the tension of the spindle chains RM-003 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-004 Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
(P) is the meeting point between the preforms and the

spindles.
Check the general synchronization before attempting

any individual synchronization, see
procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.
P
Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008
"BRM-008..
Check the torque limiters are in working position. 1-006030-47-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
PROCEDURE
1 3
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 1-006084-06-xx.svg

5- Load 3 preforms onto the infeed wheel (4).
6- Bring the preform up to the spindle tip (5) using the JOG
"BCU-013..
The preform is under the spindle tip (5).
7- Set the meeting point (P) manually.
ma nually. 2
8- Tighten the
the nut (1).
1-006527-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ynchronizing the preform infeed/oven RM-004 2/2
F Check the synchronization on the next two p reforms.

If the synchronization is out.
· Go to step 2.
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The preforms are cleared.
5
BEFORE YOU FINISH

production, see procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.
"BCU-013.
1-006100-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-005 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
(P) is the meeting point between the preforms with the

grips on the preform transfer arms (4). P
Do not confuse point (P) and the synchronization

marker "SYNCHRO" (12) engraved on the transfer
cam.
1-006030-38-xx.svg

procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.

"BRM-008..
11
Check the torque limiters are in working position.
1-010326-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-005.. 2
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 5
Consumables
1-006528-01-xx.svg
None
Specific tools
-
oven wheel dummy sector tool (2),

- guide pin (3).
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ynchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer RM-005 2/4

machine. 5 1 4 3 2 5
2- Remove the oven outfeed guide , see

procedure "BDM-028.
"BDM-028.
3- Remove one of the infeed wheel sectors on the oven
wheel, see procedure "BDM-023
"BDM-023..
4- Fit the dummy oven wheel sector (2) using the bolts (5).
5- Remove the grip from the preform tr ansfer arm (4) which
corresponds to approximately 1 spindle from the bore on
the oven wheel sector (2), see
see procedure "BDM-024.
"BDM-024.
6- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm (4).
7- Remove the preform transfer wheel/oven wheel
transmission belt (9).
8- Loosen, but do not remove, the 3 fixing bolts (6) on the
fine setting plate (10).
1-010325-01-xx.svg
9- Loosen the counter nuts (7) but bu t d

do
o no
nott remove them.
10- Position the bolts (6) in the middle of the oblong slots on
the fine setting plate (10) using the bolts (8).
12- Bring the roller (11) on the transfer arm (4) along to the
8
synchronization marker "SYNCHRO"(12) on the transfer 6
cam using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014. 7
10
13- Manually line up the bore on on the dummy oven wheel
wheel
sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1). 9
Setting the tension of a belt will change the angular

position of the synchronized elements. 1-006346-02-xx.svg
14- Position and set the oven wheel/preform transfer wheel
transmission belt (9), see procedure "BRM-008
"BRM-008..
16- Adjust the alignment
alignment of the bore on the dummy oven
11 12
wheel sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1) using
the bolts (8) on the fine setting plate (10).
17- Insert the pin (3) in the 2 bores on the tools (1) and (2).
F Make sure that the pin (3) is not obstructed.
The pin (3) is not obstructed.
· Repeat steps 16 to 17 .
18- Tighten the bolts (6) on the fine setting plate (10).
19- Tighten up the check nuts (7).
The setting position is locked.
20- Remove the pin (3).
21- Remove the dummy sector on the oven wheel (2) using
the bolts (5).
22- Fit the oven wheel infeed wheel using the bolts (5), see
procedure "BDM-023.
"BDM-023.
23- Fit the oven outfeed guide, see procedure "BDM-028.
"BDM-028.
1-006756-01-xx.svg
24- Bring the transfer arm (4) around to the working position
using the manual rotation system, see L
E
procedure "BCU-014
"BCU-014.. ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-005 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer 3
25- Remove the dummy grip (1).

26- Fit the transfer grip , see procedure "BDM-024.
"BDM-024.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the synchronizati
synchronization
on of the machine before starting
production, see procedure BNM-012 .
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ynchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer RM-005 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog /
1/4 BRM-006 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.
P
"BRM-008..

1-006030-50-xx.svg
Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see 1

procedure "BDM-015.
"BDM-015.

(P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer grips.
1-010238-01-xx.svg

the lowest number.

manual rotation system, 9
- the second technician checks the positions of the
meeting points.
1
1-010326-05-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing P
Procedure
rocedure Catalog /
ynchronizing the molds/bottle transfer RM-006 2/4
To ensure correct synchronization:

- the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely
through the guide ring (2) on the dummy grip (1),
- the reference transfer arm speed roller (9) should
position on the reference marking "DEBUT" on the
transfer cam (7).
1 2 3
1-010262-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004
PCC switched on, see procedure "BC U-004,,
7
- low pressure air circuit open,
ope n, see procedure "BCU-0
"BCU-005
05,, 1-008638-01-xx.svg
- hydraulic
hydrauli c circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
(thermal),
- ring for dummy arm-head (2),
- 3 preforms which have been cut shorter.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer arm
, see procedure "BDM-024
"BDM-024..
L
3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm . E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-006 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer 3
4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1).

5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no.1.

6- Remove the nozzle tip from blowing station n°1, see
procedure "BDM-025.
"BDM-025.
Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are
in the raised position.
7- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual
rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with
marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (7). 4 4
8- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization device
.
9- Loosen the counter nuts (5) but do not remove them.

5 6 5
The transfer wheel (8) has an angle of cle arance.
11- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2). 1-006367-02-xx.svg
If a bolt (4 ; 6) is up against the edge.
· Remove the dummy stretching rod (3).
· Shift the corresponding belt by one notch.
· Set the tension of the belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
"BRM-008.
12- Set the position of the transfer wheel using the fine
setting bolts (6) on the synchronization device.
The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the
ring (2).

(6). 8
16- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 7
"BDM-026.
"BDM-024.
"BDM-025.. 1-006369-02-xx.svg
21- Insert the 3 cut preforms into the molds, before the
meeting point.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog /
ynchronizing the molds/bottle transfer RM-006 4/4

F
Check
system,the
seesynchronization using. the manual rotation
procedure BCU-014
BCU-014.
Setting can then be optimised. At normal production

speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can change
the settings.
7
BEFORE YOU FINISH

synchronization
production, see procedure BNM-012 . 1-006368-02-xx.svg

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-007 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.
P
"BRM-008..

1-006030-29-xx.svg
Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see 1

procedure "BDM-015.
"BDM-015.

(P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer grips.

the lowest number.
1-010238-01-xx.svg
meeting points.
To ensure correct synchronization:

- the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely
through the guide ring (1) on the dummy grip (2),
- the reference transfer arm speed roller (10) should
position on the reference marking "FIN" on the
transfer cam (8).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
"BCU-004,,
- procedure
low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005,
"BCU-005, 1-008637-02-xx.svg
- hydraulic circuit procedure

circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.
"BCU-005.
L TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing P
Procedure
rocedure Catalog /
ynchronizing the preform transfer/molds RM-007 2/4
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
(thermal),
- ring for dummy arm-head (2),
- 3 preforms which have been cut shorter.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer arm
, see procedure "BDM-024

"BDM-024..
3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm .
4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1).
5
5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no.

1, see procedure "BDM-026.
"BDM-026. 4 4
6- Remove the nozzle tip from blowing station n°1, see

procedure "BDM-025.
"BDM-025.
Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are
in the raised position. 6 7 6
7- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual

"BCU-014. 1-006367-01-xx.svg
The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with

marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (8).
8- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization device
(5).
The transfer wheel (9) has an angle of clearance.
11- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2).
If a bolt (4 ; 7) is up against the edge.
· Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 8
· Shift the corresponding belt by one notch.
· Set the tension of the belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
"BRM-008.
1-006368-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-007 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds 3
the reference transfer arm speed roller (11) should

position on the reference marking "RDS" on the transfer
cam (8).
12- Set the position of the transfer wheel (9) using the fine
setting bolts (7) on the synchronization device. 9
The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the
ring (2).
10
1-010326-04-xx.svg

15- Tighten up the check
check nuts (6).
9
16- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3).
"BDM-026.
"BDM-024.
8
"BDM-025..
21- Insert the cut preforms 3 in the transfer grips, before the
meeting point.
1-006369-01-xx.svg
Extreme caution
2 technicians and perfect
is required coordination
for the between the
following operations.
F Check the synchronization using the manual rotation
system, see procedure BCU-014 .
Setting can then be optimised. At normal production

speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can change
the settings.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

synchronization
production, see procedure BNM-012 .
8 11 1 2 3
1-010262-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing P
Procedure
rocedure Catalog /
ynchronizing the preform transfer/molds RM-007 4/4

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-008 Setting the tensions on the timing belts 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
If the belts lose their tension regularly after the

commissioning period check the settings and
conditions of the various mechanical parts and replace
the belt if necessary.
Never adjust the setting bolts (1) for the tensioner (2)
positions.
Check new belts after several hours of production.
1-006580-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 4

procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
Parts
13
None
Consumables
None 8 6
Specific tools
- frequency meter (3) and instructions for use. 12 7

machine.

"BSU-003.
Referenc Belt type Tension (Hz)
e
4 Blow wheel notched belt 30 +/-1
5 Preform transfer notched belt 31 +/-2
Oven wheel notched belt, SBO 16 / 23,6
16 +1,4/-1,6
20 +0,8/-1,2
6
20 +0,8/-1,2
24 +0,6/-0,7
7 Infeed wheel notched belt 77 +/-4
* Not present with the Combi connection module (option)
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the tensions on the timing belts RM-008 2/2
Referenc Belt type Tension (Hz)

e
8 Bottle transfer wheel notched belt 25 +/-1
12 Bottle outfeed belt (option)* 16 +/-1
Notched fast unloading belt
13 70 +/- 3
(option)
3- If need be, remove the electrical unit, see

procedure "BCU-036.
"BCU-036.
To check the belt tensions with the frequency meter,
make the belts vibrate by tapping them with a flat
wrench.
F Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at
the position indicated.
If the tension is correct.
· Go to step 14
6- Set the tension of the belt using
using the tensioner (2)
adjustment bolt (11).
3
9- Repeat steps 4 to 8 until you have set the ttensions
ensions on
all of the belts.
1-006530-01-xx.svg
The belt tensions are now set.
"BSU-003.
2
11- Rotate the machine using
using the JOG, see
procedure
procedu re "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BSU-003. 9 11
F Check the belt tensions using the frequency
fr equency meter (3) at
the position indicated.

If the tension is incorrect.
· Repeat as above
above from
from step 4 .
1 10
13- Fit the electrical unit, see procedure "BCU-036
"BCU-036..
BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-006532-01-xx.svg

"BSU-003.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-009 Setting the stretching bottom thrust 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Set the bottom stretching thrusts (1) following a change

to the production item.
Never run the machine if any of the bottom thrusts (1)

have not been set.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
"BCU-005,,
- "BCU-005..
1-006200-02-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- certified standard
standard preforms for the type of production
being carried out,
- comparator and the magnetic support.
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
L
E Wear heat protection gloves.
D
I 1-006372-01-xx.svg
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the stretching bottom thrust RM-009 2/2
3- Loosen the counter-nut (2) but do not remove it.

4- Screw the stretching bottom thrust (1) fully into the thrust
(3).
5- Measure the thickness (E) of the bottom of the preform at
the injection point.
The stretching cylinder (4) is no longer blocked in the up-
The indicator (6) indicates the pressure
press ure remaining in the
cyclinder.
7- Lower the slide (7) manually.
The stretching rod (8) is in contact with the bottom of the
mold.
8- Position the conparator under the slide (7).
The adjustment of the distance "X" between the
stretching pin (8) and the base of the mold is process
function:
- X = 2/3 of the thickness (E) of the preform for items
containing a non gaseous liquid.
- X = the thickness (E) of the preform for items 4 5
containing a CSD (Carbonated Soft Drink) liquid.
- X = 1 mm for machines fitted with the scavenging 6
system (option).
9- Adjust the position of the lower stretch stop (1), to raise
the slide (7) of "X" depending on the process.
1-006371-01-xx.svg
The distance between the stretching rod (8) and the

mold base is theoretical and may vary according to the
production process.
10- Keep the stretching bottom thrust (1) in position and 7
tighten up the counter nut (2).
11- Note the bottom stretching thrust (1) to be used with this 1
mold on the station.
12- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 2 until 8 2
complete adjustment
adjustment of the lower stretch stop assembly
(1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
1-006373-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-010 Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The inner and outer cooling shields are set

simultaneously.
This procedure is a base for settings. Settings for the

cooling shields will
wil l be refined depending on the process
and the articles to be produced.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
Settings base for cooling shields and lamps:

- for preforms with non-crystalized neck, See
Illustration (A),
3
-
for preforms with crystalized neck, See Illustration
(B).
2
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012. 1-006075-02-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 2
None
Consumables
3
None
Specific tools
- mirror (1),
- certified standard
standard preforms for the type of production 1-006076-02-xx.svg
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
Setting the inner cooling shield

machine.
To faciltate tightening, the handles (2 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13) can
be disengaged.

elements (2 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13) may vary visually but their
functions remain the same. P
1-006183-01-xx.svg
4- Position 3 preforms (P) on the spindle chain opposite at
each end and in the middle of the inner cooling shield
L (4).
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the interior and exterior cooling shields RM-010 2/4

6- Set the distance of the cooling
cool ing shield (4) from the preform
bodies (P) using the screws (6) in order to obtain a value
of approx. 1,5 mm.
F Check the gap for each of the preforms (P) using a ruler 5
and a mirror (1).
1-006184-01-xx.svg
Setting the outer cooling shield

4
Depending on the setting to be done, it may be
necessary to temporarily remove the preforms (P). P
7- Set the height of the external cooling shield (7) relative to
the preform neck-rings (P) using the handles (8) and grip
nuts (9), as in Illustration (A) or (B), so as to obtain a value 1
of approx. 1,5 mm.
8- Set the gap between the external cooling shield (7) and
the preform bodies (P) using the handles (10) and screws
(11) so as to obtain a value of approx. 1,5 mm. 1-006185-02-xx.svg
F Check the gap for each of the preforms (P) using a ruler
and a mirror (1). A 3

10- Set the height of the rack (3) using the handles (13) and
grip nuts (12):
in Case (A),
· relative to the external cooling shield (7).
in Case (B),
· relative to the preform neck-rings (P).
4 7
1-008445-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-010 Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields 2
11- Set the gap between the rack (3) and the external
ext ernal cooling
shield (7) as in Illustration (A) or (B), using the handles B 3
(2) and screws (14).
16- Repeat steps 1 to 15 , to set all of the
t he outer (7) and inner
(4) cooling shields.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

4 7
1-008444-01-xx.svg
11 7 3 10 14 2
8 9 13 12
1-008443-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the interior and exterior cooling shields RM-010 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-011 Setting the infeed rail 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
First carry out the following operations:

- check that the upstream block fitted corresponds to
the type of preforms in production. If necessary
replace the up-circuit infeed block, see
procedure "BDM-018,
"BDM-018,
- check that the downstream block fitted corresponds
to the type of preforms in production. If necessary,
replace the downstream block, see
procedure "BDM-019,
"BDM-019,
- set the unscrambler roller assembly , see
1-007021-23-xx.svg
procedure "BRM-013,
"BRM-013,
- set the stabilization rail assembly , see
procedure "BRM-017.
"BRM-017.
One turn of the knob (4) in the clockwise direction

separates rails (2 ; 3) by 1 mm.
Do the settings on the upper and lower sections of the

infeed rail simultaneously.
simultaneously.
MACHINE STATUS 1 4

"BCU-017,
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 2 X 3
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools 5
being carried out, 1-006533-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE
1- If necessary, open the cover(s)in the infeed rail.

Setting the gap between the rails
3- Spread the rails (2 ; 3) using the knobs
knobs (4).
4- Pass the preforms (5) through the infeed rail gate and
position them on the rails (2 ; 3).
5- Turn the knobs (4) to adjust the rails
rail s (2 ; 3) until they come
into contact with the preforms below the necks. 4
6- Set the gap X between the rails (2 ; 3) by turning
turni ng the knobs
(4). 1-006534-01-xx.svg
X = Ø under the preform necks + 0,8 mm.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the infeed rail RM-011 2/2
The gap X must be constant along the entire length of

the infeed rail.

Setting the body-guides (6)
The rails (2 ; 3) must be set.
2 3
9- Set the gap Y on the set of guides (6) using the adjustment
knobs (7) and the counter-nuts (8). 5 6
Y = Ø preform + 2 mm.
The gap Y must be constant along the entire length of 7 7
the infeed rail.
8 8
1-006533-03-xx.svg
10- Set the height L of the guides (6) using the adjustment
knobs(7).
L = 3/4 L1.
Setting the rim guide (9) L1
The rails (2 ; 3) must be set. L

7
1-006533-04-xx.svg
12- Set the height of the gap Z between the rim guide (9) and
the preforms using the knurled rings (10).
Z = 2 mm.
The gap Z must be constant along the entire length of
the infeed rail.
10
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Z
14- If necessary, close the cover(s) on the infeed rail.
F Observe how the preforms move in production.
9 5
L
1-006539-02-xx.svg E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-012 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
The braking system is forced open pneumatically and

then closes when air is expelled.

- The first technician presses the push-button (4) to
open the brake,
- The second technician sets the position of the
1-006030-17-xx.svg
friction pads (2 ; 3).
MACHINE STATUS 2

"BCU-005.. 3

Parts
None
Consumables
1-006094-03-xx.svg
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- spring puller .
PROCEDURE

"BSU-003.
4
machine.
3- Remove the fixing bolts from the cover plate (6).
Wear latex gloves.
F Check the condition of the brake pads (2 ; 3) visually.

· Replace the pads if they have become soiled by
"BDM-033..
grease or oil, see procedure "BDM-033
F
Check the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3).
· If the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3) is less than
7 mm replace them, see procedure "BDM-033.
"BDM-033. 1-006603-05-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the positions of the braking system friction pads RM-012 2/4
8- Remove the spring (10) using the spring puller.

9- The first technician presses the button (4) and keeps it 6
pressed in.
The braking system is now open.
Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.
10- The second technician loosens the nuts (11).

11- Set the adjustment screw (12) to obtain a gap of 0,5
+0,1/0 mm between the friction pad (2) and the disc (13).
1-007075-02-xx.svg
12- Tighten the nuts (11).

7
14- Loosen the screw (15).
8
15- Tighten of loosen the screw (16) to obtain a gap of 0,5
+0,1/0 mm between the friction pad (3) and the disc (13).
16- Tighten up the screw (15). 9

18- Tighten or loosen the screws (17) to line up the friction
pads (2 ; 3) with regard to the disc
dis c (13).
When the second technician gives the order, the first
technician releases the push-button (4).
19- Loosen the screw (18) but do not remove it. 13
20- Position the cam (19) so that it is in contact with the sensor
1-006202-02-xx.svg
(20).
The sensor (20) should detect the cam (19) when the 14 16 10 12
brake is closed.
21- Tighten the bolt (18). 15

22- Position the spring (10) using the spring puller.
F Make sure that the brake d isc is clean (13).
· Clean the disc (13) if necessary, see 2
procedure "BNM-009.
"BNM-009.
23- Fit the covers (8 ; 9) with the screws (7). 3
25- Tighen up the fixing bolts on the cover plate (6). 11
1-006374-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-012 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads 3

"BSU-003..
18 10 17 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
F Check the gap b etween the frict
friction
ion pads (2 ; 3) and the 19
brake disc (13), see procedure BNM-009 .
27- Press the button (4) several times to make sure that the 20 13
brake is working properly.
3
17
1-006093-03-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the positions of the braking system friction pads RM-012 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-013 Setting the unscrambler roller assembly 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Check that the upstream block fitted corresponds

corresponds to the
type of preforms to be produced. If necessary replace
the up-circuit infeed block, see procedure "BDM-018.
"BDM-018.
1-007021-27-xx.svg
Before making any custom settings, make sure that the

initial settings are correct:
- α = 12° between the unscrambler rollers (1) and the
horizontal. α
The unscrambler rollers (1) setting modifies the
following:
- the belt tensions on models not equipped with
automatic tensioners,
- the settings of the body-guide wires (2),
- the settings of the deflectors (3). 1-010447-01-xx.svg
The intermediate bearings are fitted free and adjust

automatically when the gap between the unscrambler
rollers is being set.
The figures used for this procedure are theoretical

values. These settings will need to be adjusted
3
according to the characteristics and the performance of
the preforms in production.

regulations.
1 1
2 2
1-006540-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the unscrambler roller assembly RM-013 2/4
MACHINE STATUS A
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017.
"BCU-017.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out. 1-008966-04-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
Depending on the feeder model, the unsrambler roller
assembly is fitted with either an automatic or a manual
(A ; B) tensioner. The automatic tensioners do not
require any particular adjustments.
2- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), loosen the transmission
belt.
B
1-008939-05-xx.svg
Setting the unscrambler rollers (1)

5
3- If necessary, spread the covers (4) downstream from the
rollers (1) as far apart as possible.
4- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1). 4
The rollers (1) must be slightly further apart at the top.
5- Set the gap X between the rollers (1) using the knobs
(6).
In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler
rollers, X = Ø preform neck ring - 2 mm.
1-010445-01-xx.svg
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1), X = Ø preform
neck ring - 1 mm.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-013 Setting the unscrambler roller assembly 3
F Chec k for the correct positioning of the preforms, with no

obstruction, between the rollers (1). 14
If the preforms are not positioned correctly between
the unscrambler rollers (1). 6
· Repeat the stages above, from step 5 , to adjust
the settings of the rollers (1) depending on the 6
characteristics of the preforms. 7
6- If necessary, position the covers (4) as close as possible
to the rollers (1) without coming into contact.
7- Tighten the knobs (5).
1-010446-01-xx.svg
Setting the body-guide wires (2)

1
The body-guide wires help to stabilize the preforms in
the unscrambler rollers. 2
The body-guide wires can be spread to the maximum

in the presence of short-bodied preforms.
8- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1).
9- Remove the gate (7) to access the body-guide wires (2). 12
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1) :
10- Unscrew the nuts (8) (but do not remove) to loosen the
wires (2).
In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler rollers : 13 11
( see illustration (C) or (D) depending on the model )
1-006376-02-xx.svg
12- Set the vertical position of the supports (10).

C 1 2 1
The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length
of the preform bodies (below the neck).
13- Fit the bolts (9). 9 9
14- Set the horizontal position of the supports (10).
The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of
the preform bodies.
10 10
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1) :
16- Loosen the nuts (11) but do not remove them. 1-010448-01-xx.svg
17- Set the horzontal and vertical positions of the supports

D
(12).
The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length
of the preform bodies (below the neck). 9
The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of
the preform bodies.
19- Set the position of the tensioner rings (13) using the nuts
(8), to tension the body-guide wires (2). 10
1-010449-01-xx.svg
L 21- Fit the gate (7).
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the unscrambler roller assembly RM-013 4/4
F Chec k for the correct positioning of the preforms, with no

obstruction, between the rollers (1).
If the preforms are not positioned correctly between
the unscrambler rollers (1).
· Increase slightly the gap between the body-guide
wires(2).
Setting the deflectors (3)
Upstream, the deflectors do not require any specific

adjustment. Downstream, the deflectors are generally
parallel to the unscrambler rollers or slightly tighter to
help in correctly positioning the preforms. The spread
of the deflectors must be greater than the total length of
the preform to prevent them from blocking.
22- Set the spread of the deflectors (3) using the button(s)
(14).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

24- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), set the tension of the
unscrambler roller transmission belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
"BRM-008.
25- Set the gap for the stabilization rail assembly, see
procedure "BRM-017.
"BRM-017.
unobstructed.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-015 Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The conveyor belts that need to be set are located as

follows:
- at the preform elevator (1),
- under the unscrambler roller assembly (2),
- under the hopper (3).
1-006030-44-xx.svg
The form of the drums and the tension settings ensure 2 A 3

that the conveyor belt is guided correctly. The motor
drums are located in zones (A) and the return drums in B
zones (B). The adjustment screws (6 ; 7) of the drums
are accessible with the cover panels.

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
1 B
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
1-006699-01-xx.svg
"BCU-004,,
- preform feeder switched off.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- raised platform for workng at heights.
PROCEDURE
The setting procedure is identical for all of the preform

feeder conveyor belts.
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the tensions on the conveyor belts RM-015 2/4
The setting for the conveyor belt should eliminate:

B
- motor drum slipping,
-
flapping at
at a slack belt
belt section .
1- Remove the cover panels to check the tension of the slack
sections of the belts during the setting procedure.
6
1-006546-01-xx.svg
2- Tighten or loosen the adjustment screws

s crews (6) on the return
drums (B) to set the tension of the conveyor belts.
3- Fit the cover panels.
Centering the conveyor belts
If necessary, use the access platform to reach the

adjustment screws (7) for the motor drums (A).
"BCU-003..
A 7
1-006509-02-xx.svg
To center the conveyor belts, accessing work zones

(A) or (B) will allow you to visually observe their
movements.
The (C) window appears.
8
1-010353-19-02.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-015 Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts 2
6- Press the key for zone (D) corresponding to the conveyor

belt to be adjusted. C
7- Enter the minimum setpoint value, see
procedure "BCU-025.
"BCU-025.
8- Press the key for zone (E) corresponding to the conveyor
belt to be adjusted. D
The conveyor belt needing to be adjused has been
selected.
Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator E
activated.
1-010351-08-02.svg

9
The conveyor belt to be set must be running.
The buttons (10 ; 11) located on the unscrambler roller
unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform
elevator start/stop"
start/stop" key on the lower
lower display
display bar of
of the
PCC. The keys (10 ; 11) allow the user to start and stop 1-006704-03-xx.svg
the various components of the unscrambler rollers
selected in the "Feeder test" window
wi ndow in order to observe
their performance in contact with the preforms.
10- Tighten or loosen the bolts (6 ; 7) to center the conveyor
belt on the drums.
11- Press the key for the zone (E) corresponding to the belt 11 10
being adjusted.
The adjusted belt stops.
12- Repeat the steps above from step 6 until all of the
conveyor belts have been centered.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Observe the movem ent of the belts in producti
production.
on.
1-006375-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the tensions on the conveyor belts RM-015 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-016 Setting the height of the unscrambler unit 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see

procedure "BRM-017.
"BRM-017.
Set the height of the unscrambler unit when setting up

the machine for a new production item.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Loosen the nuts (2) but do not remove them.
2
In production, the preforms must not be obstructed
between the vanes on the unscrambler (1) and the rim
guide (3). 1
3- Position the
infeed rim unscrambler
guide (3). (1) as close as possible to the 3
Maintain an angle of 60° between the axis of the vanes

on the unscrambler and the axis of the preform
movement.
Only preforms which are laid flat or in the correct

position should pass under the unscrambler vanes . Any other position will cause the preform to be ejected by the uncram
1-010461-01-xx.svg
4- Set the height of the unscrambler (1) using the upper nut
(2).
F Check the movement of a preform laid flat under the
unscrambler vanes (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the unscrambler in production.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the height of the unscrambler unit RM-016 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/6 BRM-017 Setting up the stabilization rail assembly 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-007021-24-xx.svg
First carry out the settings on the unscrambler roller

assembly, see procedure "BRM-013
"BRM-013..
1-010447-02-xx.svg
Before making any custom settings, make sure that the 2

initial settings are correct:
- α = 15° between the stabilization rail (1) and the
horizontal,
- X = 1 mm between the preform contact point on the
unscrambler rollers (2) and the top of the under-neck
guides (3),
-
Y = 0,5 mm between the unscrambler rollers (2) and X
the under-neck guide (3),
- the axis of the stabilisation rail lined up with the axis
of the unscrambler rollers.
The angle α may be different for specific preforms. 3

1-010450-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting up the stabilization rail assembly RM-017 2/6
The settings of the under-neck guides (3) modifies the 2

following:
-
the setting of the neck guides (4),
- the settings of the neck guides(5), Y
- the settings of the rim guides (6 ; 7).
The figures used for this procedure are theoretical

values. These settings will need to be adjusted
according to the characteristics and the performance of
the preforms in production.

fitted on the machine and always follow current safety 3 A
regulations.
1-010451-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
"BCU-017,
- up-circuit infeed block fitted, see procedure "BDM-018.
"BDM-018.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
machine.
2- Remove the covers (8) upstream from the stabilization
stabiliz ation rail
9
(1) (if present).
Setting the under-neck guides (3)
8
1-010445-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3- Unscrew the knobs (10) but do not remove the them.
10
1-010455-01-xx.svg
4- Unscrew the knobs (11) down from each side of the

3
under-neck guides (3) but do not remove them.
11
1-010453-01-xx.svg
5- Unscrew the fasteners (12) upstream from each side of

the stabilization rail (1) but do not remove them. 12
6- Place a few preforms in between the under-neck guides
(3). 5
The stabilization rail (1) is equipped with a type-(D) or
type-(E) adjustment system.
16
5
12
1-010452-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
7- Unscrew the fastener(s) (13 ; 14) but do not remove

them. 2
D
15
4
13
14
1-010454-01-xx.svg
8- Set the gap (A) between the under-neck guides (3) using
the bolts (14).
A = Ø under the preform
preform necks + 0,5 mm.
mm. E
The setting should be identical for each of the under-

neck guides, such that the axis of the stabilization rail 3
(1) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler
rollers (2).
9- Tighten the fasteners (13 ; 14).
10- Tighten the fasteners (12).
14
11- Tighten the knobs (10 ; 11).
Setting the body-guides (4)
In production, if there is an excessive accumulation of

preforms, the body guides (4) can be spread to the
maximum. 1-010456-01-xx.svg
12- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3).

13- Set the gap (B) on the body-guides (4) using the knobs
(15).
B = Ø under the preform necks + 2 mm.
The gap between the body-guides (4) must be set using
u sing 3
both of the knobs (15) located along each side of the
guides (4). 15
4
1-010459-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
The setting must be identical for each of the knobs C

(15) such that the axis of the body-guides (4) remains
lined up with the axis of the stabilization rail (1). 5

The gap (B) must be constant along the length of the
body-guides (4).
16
Setting the neck-guides (5)
14- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3). 3
1-010565-01-xx.svg
15- Unscrew the screws (16) along each body-guide (3) but
21 ; 22 17 24 19 ; 20 17 18
do not remove them.
16- Set the gap (C) on the body-guides (5) with regard to the
preform neck ring.
C = Ø preform neck ring + 2 mm.
Setting the rim guides (6 ; 7)
19- Set the support (18) so that the axis of the rim guides (6 ;
7) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler
unsc rambler rollers
(2).
7 3 16 5 6 15
21- Unscrew the fasteners
fastene rs (19 ; 20) along the infeed rim guide
(6). 1-010561-01-xx.svg
22- Unscrew the fasteners (21 ; 22) along the outfeed rim
guide (7).
The longitudinal position of the outfeed rim guide (7) is
determined by the elements located downstream.
23- Set the longitudinal position of the infeed rim guide (6) so
that it is in contact with the outfeed rim guide (7).
24- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6).
25- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the
preform using the knobs (19).
The laid-down preform must pass freely under the rim
guide (6).
27- Position a preform under the outfeed rim guide (7).
28- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the rim
on the preform using the knobs (21).
The preform must pass freely under the rim guide (7).
30- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6).
L 31- Push the laid-down preform along manually up to the
E
D
I outfeed rim guide (7).
S
©
SBO 20/24
F Check that the laid-down preform is stopped by the

outfeed rim guide (7).
If the preform passes freely under the outfeed rim
guide (7).
Setting the stop-pin (23)
33- Bring the stop-pin out manually (23).
34- Position a preform near the stop-pin (23).
The stop-pin (23) must not extend past the preform
movement axis.
35- Set the position of the stop-pin (23) using the screws
25
(25).
36- Fit the casing (24).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
37- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016.

"BRM-016. 23
38- Refit the covers (8) using the knobs (9) (if present).
40- Set the gap on the infeed rail , see
1-010464-01-xx.svg
procedure "BRM-011
"BRM-011..
unobstructed.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-018 Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

P
(P) is the meeting point of the bottles between the

transfer grips (1) and the bottle outfeed wheel (2).

procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.

"BRM-008.. 1-006580-08-xx.svg
Check the torque limiters are in working position. 4 1 5

2
meeting points.
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-005..
8
PROCEDURE

machine.
1-006581-01-xx.svg
2- Untighten, without removing, the 3 fastenings (3) of the
synchronization
synchroniza tion device.
3- Fit 3 bottles (4) in 3 transfer grips (1).
3
4- Bring the roller (6) using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
The roller (6) on the first transfer grip is lined up with the
marker "SORTIE" (7) on the bottle transfer wheel (5).
5- Set the meeting point (P) between the bottle (4) with the
notches (8) on the bottle outfeed wheel (2) manually.
1-006579-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ynchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer RM-018 2/2
6- Tighten the fixing bolts (3) on the synchronization device.

devic e.
6 7
7- Check the synchronization on the 3 following bottles (4)
by turning the bottle transfer wheel (5) using the manual
"BCU-014.
8- Remove the 3 bottles (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

production, see procedure "BNM-012.
"BNM-012.
1-006582-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-021 Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

- Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BRM-021".
- Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BRM-023".

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.

and pressure.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face A B

stipulated risks.

MACHINE STATUS
- molds at production temperature, 1-007335-01-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
-
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- 4 thickness gauges 0,15 mm,
- locking system holding brace .
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the compensation system using single bars (HR) RM-021 2/4
Warning - risk of burns. 3
Wear heat protection gloves. 1;2
1- Remove the mold base on the station concerned, see

procedure "BDM-011.
"BDM-011. 3
Check the gap Y = 0,15 +0,1/+0 mm at points (10)

between the mold shells (6) outside of the vent areas. 1;2
F Check if the gap X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm and the gap Y = 0,15

+0,1/+0 mm. 3
If yes,
Go to step 19 .
If not,
not,
Continue with the procedure. 2
1
Tighten the nuts (3) diagonally to position the left half 7
8
5- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see 9 5
procedure
procedu re "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
X
procedure
"BSU-001.
7- Position the 4 0,15 mm thickness gauges on the half-mold
(6) at points (10).
1-007324-01-xx.svg
F Make sure that the gauges are out of the vent zone.
Grease the gauges to insert them more easily.
8- Remove rethe
procedure
procedu locking. system holding brace
"BSU-001
"BSU-001. , see

5
procedure
"BSU-001.
10- Loosen the nuts (3).
The elastic rings (7) come free. 4
11 Manually screw in the bolts (2) into the left shell (4)
support.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
1-006314-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-021 Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) 3

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
16- Remove the 4 0,15 mm thickness gauges.
17- Remove the locking system holding brace , see 10 10
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
6
Locking should take place without obstruction.
18- Close the mold support unit manually, see 10

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
F Check the gap Y = 0,15 +0,1/+0 mm at points (10)
10
between the m old shells (6) outside of the vent areas.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Remount the mold base on the blowing station

"BDM-011..
concerned, see procedure "BDM-011 1-007327-01-xx.svg

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the compensation system using single bars (HR) RM-021 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-022 Setting the bottle base outfeed guide 1
MACHINE STATUS
-
all machine power and utilities turned off, see
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
- 1 certified acceptable bottle (1).
PROCEDURE

machine. 2
2- Position 1 certified acceptable bottle (1) on the neck
guides (2). 1
3- Remove the trunnion nut (3).
4- Position the bottle outfeed base guide (4) to obtain the
clearance "X" = 5 mm between the bottle outfeed base
guide (4) and the base of the certified bottle (1).
Tighten up the nut (3) onto the flat-section on the shaft
(5). 4
5- Remove the certified bottle (1) from the neck guides (2).
X
BEFORE YOU FINISH

5 3
1-006589-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the bottle base outfeed guide RM-022 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BRM-023 Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) 3
GENERAL INFORMATION

- Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BRM-021".
- Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BRM-023".

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) RM-023 2/4
Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face A B


stipulated risks.

and pressure.

1-007335-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 3
- molds at production temperature, 1;2
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001, 3
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002, 1;2
"BCU-004,,
- PCC application set to "Settings", 3
- "BCU-005,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2
1
Parts
None 7
Consumables
None 4
8
Specific tools
(thermal),
9 5
- 4 thickness
thickness gauges 0,05 mm,
mm, X
- locking system holding brace .
PROCEDURE
1-007324-01-xx.svg
1- Remove the mold base on the station concerned, see

procedure "BDM-011.
"BDM-011.
Make sure that the gap is Y = 0,05 +/-0,02 mm at points
(10) between the 4 holding bars (6).
F Check if the gap X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm and the gap Y = 0,05
+/-0,02 mm.
L
If yes. E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
3/4 BRM-023 Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) 3
Go to step 19 .
If not.
Continue with the procedure.
shell support correctly (4).
5 4
5- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually,
manually, see X X
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. Y
7- Position the 4 0,05 mm thickness gauges on the holding
bars (6) at points (10).
Grease the gauges to insert them more easily.

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
6
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
1-006753-01-xx.svg
10- Loosen the nuts (3).
The elastic rings (7) come free.
11- Manually screw in the bolts (2) into the left shell (4)
support.
14- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see 10 10
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. 6
15- Insert the locking system holding brace, see 6
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
16- Remove the 4 0,05 mm thickness gauges. 10
17- Remove the
the locking system holding brace , see
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001. 10
Locking should take place without obstruction.

procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
1-007268-01-xx.svg
F Make sure that the gap is Y = 0,05 +/-0,02 mm at points
(10) between the 4 holding bars (6).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Remount the

the mold base on the blowing station
concerned, see procedure "BDM-011
"BDM-011..
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR) RM-023 4/4
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BRM-044 Setting the stretching cylinder rollers 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-18-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
-
main electrical
procedure "BCU-002, circuit
"BCU-002, under power, see
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-013,,
JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005,
"BCU-005,
- "BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- set of thickness gauges.
PROCEDURE
1- Advance the stretching cylinder (1) in question on the

5
horizontal part of the stretching
stretchin g cam (2), using manua
manuall
"BCU-014..
rotation, see procedure "BCU-014
2- Open the safety doors at the
the relevant zone on th
thee
machine.
"J" represents the
t he gap between the cam follower (2) and
the stretching cam (3). 4
1-008059-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
etting the stretching cylinder rollers RM-044 2/2
4- Tighten or loosen the stretching cylinder (5) rod (4) to set

the gap J = 0,2 ±0,1 mm, using a thickness gauge to 5
measure it.
5- Hold the rod (4) using the pipe wrench and tighten the nut
(1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

2
J 3
1-008057-03-xx.svg
F Check the setting of the upper stretching cylinder stop
shock absorber (6), see procedure BDM-069 . 6

1-008058-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Greasing procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Greasing the transfer arm guides ............................................................................................................. BGM-001
Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps ............................................
...............................................................................
................................... BGM-005
Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-006
Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring ............................................
.................................................................................
..................................... BGM-007
Greasing the stretching guides ..................................................
.........................................................................................................
..............................................................
....... BGM-008
Greasing the mold base support assembly guides ............................................
..................................................................................
...................................... BGM-009
Changing the oil in the reducer motor ...................................................................................................... BGM-010
Greasing the molds (cavities) ................................................................................................................... BGM-011
Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units .................................................................................. BGM-013
Greasing the coder wheel gear ................................................................................................................ BGM-014
Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements ......................................
.............................................................................
................................................
......... BGM-015
Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements ................................................................................
......................................................................................
...... BGM-017
Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings .................................................................................................. BGM-018
Greasing the mold support unit locking system ......................................
..............................................................................
.................................................
......... BGM-019
Greasing the preform ejection cams ........................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................... BGM-020
Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam ...................................................................................................... BGM-021
Transfer cam lubrication ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....... BGM-030
Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units .........................................
................................................
....... BGM-031
Greasing the blowing function cams ........................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................... BGM-032
Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge ...................................................................................... BGM-033
Greasing the reducer motor bearing .............................................................
........................................................................................................
........................................... BGM-035
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure
1/2 BGM-001 Greasing the transfer arm guides 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as

this may cause permanent damage to the parts being
greased.
1cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shots from

the greae gun.
The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need 1-006030-02-xx.svg
to be greased when they are assembled for the first
time.
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005.. 1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- If need be, open the vision system, see
procedure "BCU-036
"BCU-036..
F Check the condition of the guides (1).
F Chec k the gap at the rail (2) with regard to the guide (1).
3- Inject 1,6 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into the greasing
nipple (3) using the grease gun.
4- Remove any excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.
Apply the same procedure
procedure to the accessible preform
L
and bottle transfer arms.
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure Part C
reasing the transfer arm guides GM-001 2/2

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The following transfer arms are opposite the working
position.
6- Repeat the previous steps, from step 3 , until all the
guidances (1) of the transfer arms have been greased.
"BCU-036.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-005 Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps 2
A B
GENERAL INFORMATION
The spindle rollers are greased in 2 stages:

- first the outer rollers (1) on the oven wheel (A),
- then the inner rollers (2) on the tensioner wheel (B).
1-006030-34-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS A

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,, 1
"BCU-005,,
- oven cold.
1-006381-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps GM-005 2/2
Greasing the outer spindle rollers

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Wipe the grease off the outer rollers (1) using
usi ng a clean, dry B
cloth.
3- Apply the "LUB
"LUB A15" grease
grease to the outer rollers (1)
(1) using
a paintbrush.
Area to be greased
4- Rotate the machine using

using the JOG, se
see
e
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The following rollers are at your working position.
5- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have greased all
of the outer rollers (1).
6- Disconn
Disconnect
ect the JOG, see procedure
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Greasing the inner spindle rollers 2

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013. 1-006382-01-xx.svg
8- Wipe the spent grease off the inner rollers (2) using a
clean, dry cloth.
9- Apply the "LUB
"LUB A15" grease
grease to the inner
inner rollers
rollers (2) using
using
a paintbrush.
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The following rollers are at your working position.
of the inner rollers (2).
"BCU-013.
3
Greaseing the turnover ramps
machine..
machine
14- Wipe the spent grease off the turnover ramps (3) using a
clean, dry cloth.
15- Apply the "LUB A15" grease to the turnover ramps (3)
using a paintbrush.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
17- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Never wipe the grease off the movement surfaces of the 1-006383-01-xx.svg
spindle rollers (1 ; 2).
18- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth.
"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-006 Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring 2
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
1-006030-93-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 40" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure
procedure "BSU-003.
"BSU-003.
Depending on the type of machine and accessibility,
remove the elements (1 ; 2) or (2 ; 3 ; 4).

1
1-008402-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring GM-006 2/2
3- Clean the various components removed, using a clean,

dry cloth.
4- Wipe the spent

drive ring grease
(5) using off the
a clean drytoothing
cloth. on the oven wheel 2
1-008401-03-xx.svg
5- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (5) using

a paintbrush and the "LUB 40" grease.
Area to be greased

"BSU-003.
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
The next section of the drive ring (5) is accessible.
3 4
1-008423-04-xx.svg

of the drive ring toothing (5).
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing
(5).
11- Install the different elements that have been removed. 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
1-006384-02-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-007 Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring 2
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
1-006030-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 40" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Wipe the spent grease off the toothing on the oven wheel
drive ring (1) using a clean dry cloth.
3- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (1) using
a paintbrush and the "LUB 40" grease.
Area to be greased
The toothing on the drive gear (2) is inaccessible and

will be greased by contact with the drive ring (1).
4- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see 1
procedure BCU-013.
BCU-013.
The next section of the drive ring (1) is accessible.
of the drive ring toothing (1). 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1-006385-01-xx.svg
Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing

(1).
"BCU-013.
The procedure is now comple te.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog /
reasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring GM-007 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-008 Greasing the stretching guides 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

greased.
1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shot from

The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need

time.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 3

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
- main electrical
electrical circuit under
under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 1 2
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
JOG implementation window. 4
1- Connect the JOG to the
the work zone, see
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Check the condition of the guides
guides (1).
F Check the gap between the slide (2) and the rail (4).
3- Wipe off the grease nipples (3) using a clean dry cloth.
4- Inject 2 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into each nipple (3)
using the grease gun "ALGI".
3
6- Clean off excess grease.
7- Bring the next blow station around to your working 1-006386-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
L 8- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all
E
D
I of the stretching guides (1).
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the stretching guides GM-008 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-009 Greasing the mold base support assembly guides 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

greased.
1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shot from

The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need

time.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the mold base support assembly guides GM-009 2/2

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Check the condition of the guides (1).

3- Check the gap at the guide (1) with regard to the rail (2).
5- Inject 1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into the nipple (3) using
6- Clean the greasing nipple (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 2
7- Clean off excess grease.
8- Bring the next blow station around to your working 1
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
9- Repeat as above from step 2 until all of the guides (1) on
the mold base support assemblies have been greased. 3
BEFORE YOU FINISH

"BCU-013.
1-006387-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-010 Changing the oil in the reducer motor 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always follow current

current legislation
legislation when disposing of
of the
used oil.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- reducer motor cold or preferably warm.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-17-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
-
"LUB 37" oil,

Specific tools
- oil pump,
- a container for the used oil.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Position the container
contai ner for the used oil under the drain plug
(1).
3- Remove the filler cap (2).
4- Remove the drain plug (1). 1
F
The
Wait oil drains
until all offrom thehas
the oil reducer motor.
drained off.
5- Fit the drain plug (1).
6- Inject 4,2 L of "LUB 37" oil into the reducer motor using 1-006906-02-xx.svg
the oil pump.
7- Fit the filler cap (2).
8- Remove the oil container.
9- Clean the reducer motor using a clean, dry cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

2
1-006997-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hanging the oil in the reducer motor GM-010 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-011 Greasing the molds (cavities) 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

open position before attempting any work on it see
procedure "BSU -001.
-001.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth.
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE

1
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
-001.
-001. 5
4- Wipe the spent grease off the guide studs (1) and the
guide slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear ring
(4) using a clean, non-abrasive dry cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with "NET A03".
5- Use a clean, dry, non-abrasive

non-abrasive cloth to wipe the guide
guide
studs (1) and
and slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear
ring (4).
1-006389-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the molds (cavities) GM-011 2/2
6- Clean the cavities (5) in the half-molds using a clean, dry,

non-abrasive cloth. 2
7- Grease the guide studs (1) and slots (2), the wear
washers (3) and the wear ring (4) with the "LUB A15"
grease and a paintbrush.
Area to be greased 5

-001.
position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU 3
-013..
-013
11- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all 1-006388-01-xx.svg
of the molds on the machine,

"BCU-013.
5 4
1-006390-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-013 Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

open position before attempting any work on it see
-001.
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

corresponds to 1 shot from
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 3 1
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002
"BCU-002,,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease, 2
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth.

Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease gun. 4
1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, se
see
e
procedure "BCU-013
"BCU-013..
2- Wipe off the grease nipples (1 ; 2) using a clean dry cloth.
clot h.
1 2
cm3 of "LUB 29" grease
3- Inject 11 cm grease into each nipple (1 ;
2) using the grease gun "ALGI".
clot h.
clot h.
3
6- Inject 3 cm of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (3 ; 4)
1-006393-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units GM-013 2/2

clot h.
3 4
position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU
-013..
-013
of the mold support units.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1-006394-01-xx.svg
11- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually.
-001.
-001.
position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU
-013..
-013
17- Repeat as above from step 13 until you have cleaned all
the mold support units.
"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-014 Greasing the coder wheel gear 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
"BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
2- Bring the coder wheel around to your working position
using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
3- Wipe the grease from the rings (1) using a clean, dry
cloth. 1
4- Grease the rings (1) with LUB 29 grease using the
paintbrush.
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-006395-01-xx.svg
5- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, se

see
e
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Do not wipe off the grease already present
prese nt on the crown
rings (1).
"BCU-013.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the coder wheel gear GM-014 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-015 Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

1-006030-35-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease
grease gun.
PROCEDURE 1
1-008408-01-xx.svg
2- Key in a rate
procedure instruction
"BPU-004
"BPU-004. . of 10 % the nominal rate, see
(2).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the blow wheel drive ring movements GM-015 2/2


Change the greaser every 3 shots from the grease gun
to ensure that the grease is applied evenly.
6- Inject 13 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1)
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The machine stops.
9- Enter the production output rate. see
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
2
1-006403-18-02.svg
1-006704-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-017 Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

1-006030-05-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease
grease gun.
PROCEDURE 1
1-008417-01-xx.svg
2- Key in a rate
"BPU-004
"BPU-004. . of 10 % the nominal rate, see
(2).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog /
reasing the oven wheel drive ring movements GM-017 2/2

1-006403-18-02.svg

to ensure that the grease is applied evenly. 3
6- Inject 7cm3 of "LUB 29" grease
grease into each nipple (1) using
the grease gun "ALGI". 1-006704-04-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
The machine stops.

procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-018 Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

1-006030-05-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1

"BCU-001,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease
grease gun.
PROCEDURE
2- Key in a rate
"BPU-004
"BPU-004. . of 10% the nominal rate, see
(2).
1-008419-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the oven wheel shaft bearings GM-018 2/2


to ensure that the grease is applied evenly.
6- Inject 8 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1) using
the grease gun "ALGI".
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The machine stops.
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
2
1-006403-18-02.svg
1-006704-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-019 Greasing the mold support unit locking system 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

-001.
The frequencies with which the locking pin and the

holding lock are different. For further
information, please refer to chapter "Maintenance
schedule" chapter in the User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-01-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
"BCU-004,,
- "BCU-005..
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A18" grease,
Specific tools
-
locking system holding brace ,
- Clean, dry brush,
- "44. 30 x 32" thin flat-head wrench.
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the mold support unit locking system GM-019 2/2
Greasing the mold support unit locking pins

7
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
1
2- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually.
3- Insert the locking system
system holding brace, se
see
e
-001.
4- Loosen the
the nut (1).
2
6- Clean the locking components using a clean, dry cloth.
7- Use a paintbrush
paintbrush to apply the
the "LUB A18" grease to the
shaft (3), the anti-torque guide (4), the locking
locki ng pins (5) and
the bores (6).
1-006688-01-xx.svg

10- Remove the locking system holding brace , see 6
procedure "BSU-001.
"BSU-001.
11- Close the mold support unit manually. 5
Greasing the mold support unitlocking system holding lock
12- Remove the box (7).
13- Remove the spring (8).
14- Remove the holding lock (9). 4
15- Use a paintbrush

box (7), thespring to
(8)apply theholding
and the "LUB A18" grease to the
lock (9).
16- Position the holding lock (9).
17- Position the spring (8). 1-006687-01-xx.svg
18- Fit the box (7).

8
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
20- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all 7
of the mold support unit locking systems.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
9
-001.
1-006501-01-xx.svg
"BCU-013.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-020 Greasing the preform ejection cams 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1) using
usi ng a clean,
dry cloth.
3- Grease the cam races (1) using a paintbrush and the
"LUB A15" grease.
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Do not wipe the cam races (1). 1
4- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.

1-006507-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the preform ejection cams GM-020 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-021 Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE
1- Clean the spent grease off the

t he cam race (1) using a clean,
dry cloth.
2- Grease the cam race (1) using a paintbrush and the "LUB
29" grease.
Do not wipe the cam race (1).
3- Wipe any excess grease off the cam (1).
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1
1-007162-02-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the nozzle raise safety cam GM-021 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-030 Transfer cam lubrication 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

The grease distributor

distribut or distributes partial doses of
grease to the preform (A) and bottle (B) transfer wheel
cams.
1-006030-35-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
- Clean, dry cloths. B 1 A
Specific tools
1-008061-01-xx.svg
- "ALGI" grease
grease gun.
PROCEDURE
2- Key in a rate instruction of 10 % the nominal rate, see

procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
(2).
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ransfer cam lubrication GM-030 2/2


BEFORE YOU FINISH

The machine stops.
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
1-006403-18-02.svg
1-006704-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM
BGM-031 Lubrica
icati
tion
on of th
the
e unlo
lock
ckin
ing
g and lo
lock
ckin
ing
g ca
cam
ms of the
the mold-s
ld-su
upport units
its 2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A29" grease,
Specific tools
- Clean, dry brush.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1 ; 2) using a
clean, dry cloth. 1
1-007709-01-xx.svg
3- Grease the cam races (1 ; 2) using a paintbrush and the

"LUB A29" grease.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-013.
"BCU-013.
Do not wipe the cam races (1 ; 2). 1-007710-01-xx.svg
5- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
ubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units GM-031 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-032 Greasing the blowing function cams 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

The grease distributor

distribut or distributes partial doses of
grease to:
- stretching cam (A),
- mold opening/closing cam (B),
- Mold base raise/lower cam (C).
1-006030-35-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS A C

"BCU-001.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease
grease gun.
PROCEDURE
2- Key in a rate instruction of 10% the nominal rate, see

procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
1 B
(2).
1-008062-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the blowing function cams GM-032 2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH

The machine stops.
procedure "BPU-004.
"BPU-004.
1-006403-18-02.svg
1-006704-04-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-033 Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the grease cartridge (1) when replacing the

control unit (2).
If anomalies occur with the piloted automatic greaser,

the corresponding fault is displayed on the JOG.
1-006030-32-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012, 4
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 8
- grease cartridge (1),
- control unit (2) if necessary.
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal 3
machine.
2- Unclip the electrical connector (3) by pulling on its axle. 5
3 Loosen and remove the automatic greasing unit (4)
manually.
4- Remove the cover (5) manually.
5- Remove the control unit (2). 2
Dispose of the grease cartridge (1) in accordance with

Refit
1
6- If the control unit (2) is defective replace it.
7- Fit the control unit (2) on the new grease cartridge (1).
8- If the control unit has been replaced, position the switches
(6) in the same way as on the old control unit.
9- Fit the cover (5) and screw it on manually. 7
1-007964-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure
Procedure Catalog /
iloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge GM-033 2/2
10- Clean the area around the automatic greasing unit (4)
using a clean dry cloth. 2

Never screw on the greaser a second time lest you ruin
the auto-seal of the threads.
12- Screw the automatic greaser (4) lightly onto its base (8). 6
Observe the positioning of the electrical connector pins

(3).
13- Clip on the electrical connector (3).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007965-01-xx.svg
F Check the greasing system in production.
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BGM-035 Greasing the reducer motor bearing 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1 cm3 of "LUB 29"

This procedure requires 6 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease
1-006030-77-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
"BCU-001.
- machine empty.
empty.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
- Clean, dry cloths. 2 1
Specific tools
1-010734-00-xx.svg
-
"ALGI" grease gun.
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013
greased
To ensure a uniform distribution of grease, carry out the

operation 2 times.
5- Turn the machine 1 time uusing the JOG.
L
E 8- Clean off excess grease
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
reasing the reducer motor bearing GM-035 2/2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
9- Disconnect the JOG. see procedure "BCU-013

L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE BNE
Checking the electrical connections .......................................................................................................... BNE-001
Inspection/cleaning: fan filters ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................... BNE-002
Cleaning an infrared camera ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... BNE-003
Cleaning the photo-electric sensors .......................................................................................................... BNE-004
Checking the beacon stack ....................................................................................................................... BNE-005
Checking the speed controller parameters .........................................................
...............................................................................................
...................................... BNE-006
REMOVAL / REFIT PROCEDURE BDE

Removal / refit - plc batteries ............................................................................
....................................................................................................................
........................................ BDE-001
Removal / refit - plc memory card ............................................................................................................. BDE-003
Removal / refit: striker fuses ...................................................
.............................................................................................................
..................................................................
........ BDE-004
Removal / refit - UPS battery ....................................................................................................................
............................................................................. ....................................... BDE-005
Removal / refit - UPS ................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................ ................................ BDE-006
Removal / refit - power controller box .......................................................................................................
............................................................ ........................................... BDE-007
Removal / refit - oven lamps .............................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
........................................ BDE-009
Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps ................................................................................................................... BDE-010
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BRE

Setting the inductive detectors .................................................................................................................. BRE-001
Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed .................................................................
....................................................................
... BRE-002
Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera ...................................................................................................
.......................................................... ......................................... BRE-003
Configuring an infrared camera ........................................................................................................
................................................. ...............................................................
........ BRE-004
Synchronizing preform loading .................................................
.........................................................................................................
................................................................
........ BRE-005
Setting the air conditioning ........................................................................................................................ BRE-009
Setting the torque limiter sensors ......................................................................................................
................................................. ............................................................
....... BRE-010
Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail .................................................................................................
......................................................... ........................................ BRE-014
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail ........................................................................
.............................................................................
..... BRE-015
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers ...................................................................
.......................................................................
.... BRE-016
Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly ....................................
...........................................................................
.................................................
.......... BRE-018
L
E
D
I
S
©
Publication date : 13/11/2009 D - 1/ 2
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part D
L
E
ID
S
©
D - 2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009
SBO 20/24
Electrical operation procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Checking the electrical connections .......................................................................................................... BNE-001
Inspection/cleaning: fan filters ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................... BNE-002
Cleaning an infrared camera ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... BNE-003
Cleaning the photo-electric sensors .......................................................................................................... BNE-004
Checking the beacon stack ....................................................................................................................... BNE-005
Checking the speed controller parameters .........................................................
...............................................................................................
...................................... BNE-006
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure
1/2 BNE-001 Checking the electrical connections 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Checking the electrical connections:

- when installing the machine,
- during a technical shutdown or at least once a year.
The first inspection should be made before the end of

the manufacturer's warranty period.
MACHINE STATUS
- all machine power and utilities turned off, see 1-006030-00-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
- mains power switch, open.
PROCEDURE
1- Check and systematically tighten up all of the screws

holding the electrical connections in position in the
various electrical boxes and the electrical cabinet.
2- Check and tighten up the autotransformer connections if
the machine is fitted with one.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure Part D
hecking the electrical connections NE-001 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNE-002 Inspection/cleaning: fan filters 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fan filters are located as follows:
- next to the control station (1),
- next to the PCC(2),
- on the front the hopper electrical cabinet (3),
- unscrambler rollers electrical cabinet front (4),
- on the on-board cabinets (5) in the mobile section.

- the first activates manual rotation,
1-006030-27-xx.svg
- the second controls the access to the on-board
cabinets (5).
MACHINE STATUS

"BCU-005.. 1
PROCEDURE
Fixed section filters

machine.
2- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.
F Check the condition of the filter.
filter.
· If the filter is soiled go to step 3 .
· If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 5 .
3- Rinse the filter with water. 1-006349-01-xx.svg
4- Dry the filter.

5- Fit the filter on the support.
6- Repeat steps 2 to 5 .
The filters are clean.
2
1-006347-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
nspection/cleaning:
nspection/cleaning: fan filters NE-002 2/2
Filters on the mobile section

machine.
8- Use the manual rotation system to bring the on-board
cabinets (5) into an accessible position, see
procedure "BCU-014.
"BCU-014.
9- Open the door to the cabinet (5).
10- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.
F Check the condition of the filter.
· If the filter is soiled go to step 11 .
3
· If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 13 .
1-008518-01-xx.svg
11- Rinse the filter with water.

4
12- Dry the filter.
13- Fit the filter on the support.
14- Close the door to the cabinet (5).
15- Repeat steps 8 to 14 .
The filters are clean.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

5
1-006348-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNE-003 Cleaning an infrared camera 1
1;2;3
GENERAL INFORMATION
Camera
Controls the temperature of the preform bodies at
1
oven outfeed
Controls the temperature of the preform necks at oven
2
outfeed (option)
4
Controls the temperature of the preform bases at oven
3
outfeed (option)
Controls the temperature of the items at mold
4
outfeed (option)
1-006030-72-xx.svg
The number of cameras varies depending on the

process and the options available on the machine.
The cleaning procedure is identical for each camera.
Do not alter the position of the components when

cleaning them.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- optical cleaning solution.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Clean the sensor (1) lens (5) with a cloth dipped in the
cleaning solution. 5
3- Wipe the lens (5) on the sensor using a clean, dry cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
4- Close the safetyisdoors.

The procedure now complete.
1
L 1-006068-02-xx.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
leaning an infrared camera NE-003 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNE-004 Cleaning the photo-electric sensors 1
7
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sensor
Unscrambler rollers and elevator column B102.1
1
stoppage (D1)
8
B102.0
2 Unscrambler roller exit
(D3)
6
B105.0
3 Upper count cell
(D5)
Unscrambler roller anticipated start B103.3 5
4
sensor (D4)
5 Detection of preforms at top of rail B10.5 4
3 2 1
6 Detection of preforms at bottom of rail B10.6
7 Detection of preforms at machine infeed B32.1 1-006030-06-xx.svg
8 Bottle blockage detection

detection in chute (option) B13.1
MACHINE STATUS 10

procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- optical cleaning solution.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
1-006762-04-xx.svg
2- Clean the photo-electric cells (9) and the reflectors (10)
using a cloth
cloth dipped in the optical
optic al cleaning solution.
3- Wipe the photo-electrical cells (9) and the reflectors (10)
BEFORE YOU FINISH

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
leaning the photo-electric sensors NE-004 2/2
1-006072-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNE-005 Checking the beacon stack 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The order of the lamps on the beacon stack (2) is, from
top to bottom; red, yellow, green and blue.
1-006030-07-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
"BCU-002,
- "BCU-004,,
PROCEDURE

The lamps in the beacon stack (2) light up one by one and
the sequence is completed with an alarm siren (3).
2- Replace fault lamps by turning the collars (4) a quarter
turn.
1
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-010353-23-02.svg
3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.
4
1-006073-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the beacon stack NE-005 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BNE-006 Checking the speed controller parameters 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

The procedure is solely for checking the parameters of the
speed controllers.
List of parameters to be checked :
This list is intended as an example and is by no means

exhaustive. See the real list in the machine's electrical
file.
1-006030-08-xx.svg
Operation / Display
0.01 Language
0.40 Key on LCP
Load / motor
1.20 Motor Power
1.22 Motor Voltage
1.23 Motor Frequency
1.24 Motor Current
1.25 Motor Nominal Speed
References / Ramps
3.03 Maximum Reference
3.41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
3.42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
Limits / Warnings
4.10 Motor speed Direction
4.13 Motor Speed High Limit
Analog In/Out
5.40 (0) Function Relay (1)
5.40 (1) Function Relay (2)
Comm. and Options
8.01 Control Site
Profibus
9.16 PCD Read Configuration
9.22 Telegram Selection
Not all of the parameters may need to be checked,

depending on the controller.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002.
"BCU-002.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
hecking the speed controller parameters NE-006 2/2
Parts
- controller setting sheet (see electrical file).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1- Open the door to the electrical cabinet.

the "menu" page appears.
3- Press keys (2).
The required menu is selected.
The selected menu appears. 1
5- Check the configuration against the setting sheet for the
corresponding controller.
If the readings
readings do not match,
match, contact SIDEL.
4
6- Press the key (4) to return to the previous menu.

1-006074-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Electrical operation procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Removal / refit - plc batteries ............................................................................
....................................................................................................................
........................................ BDE-001
Removal / refit - plc memory card ............................................................................................................. BDE-003
Removal / refit: striker fuses ...................................................
.............................................................................................................
..................................................................
........ BDE-004
Removal / refit - UPS battery ....................................................................................................................
............................................................................. ....................................... BDE-005
Removal / refit - UPS ................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................ ................................ BDE-006
Removal / refit - power controller box .......................................................................................................
............................................................ ........................................... BDE-007
Removal / refit - oven lamps .............................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
........................................ BDE-009
Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps ................................................................................................................... BDE-010
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure
1/2 BDE-001 Removal / refit - plc batteries 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Misuse of lithium batteries may cause fire or explosion.
Never bring the batteries into contact with water of

flame.
Never expose the batteries to sources of heat greater

than 100 °C. 1-006030-13-xx.svg
Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household 1

waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic
bag and send them to a waste treatment center.
PLC data is saved by lithium batteries. When a battery

is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (1) on the corresponding 5
power module will light up, indicating a battery fault.
If any one of the batteries is faulty, SIDEL recommends 2

that you replace all of the batteries.
Replace the batteries with the plc switched On (switch

on power modules to "I").
MACHINE STATUS
Machine isolated except for: 3

procedure "BCU-001,
"BCU-001,
-
plc On.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- Lithium batteries "AA - 3,6 V".
1-007067-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure Part D
emoval / refit - plc batteries DE-001 2/2
Removal
2- Set the switches (2) on all of the power modules to
position "I".
3- Open the cover (3).
4- Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by pulling the
plastic strap.
Refit 4
5- Insert the batteries (4) into the housing on the power
module.
Make sure that the battery poles are inserted the right
way around and that the plastic flanges are fitted
correctly.
6- If the red "BAF" lamp (1) comes on, turn the "FMR"
(Failure Message Reset) switch (5) on the power supply
module. 3
If the battery fault lamp goes out.
The batteries are now functional.
If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit:
· Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by pulling
pulli ng
the plastic strap.
· Short-circuit the batteries for 3 second maximum.
· Re-insert the batteries.
If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit.
The batteries are faulty.
1-007068-01-xx.svg
· Repeat as above from step 4 with new batteries
(4).
7- Fit the cover (3).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

4
1-006113-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDE-003 Removal / refit - plc memory card 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Never remove a memory card when the plc is switched

on.
The memory card used here is an "EEPROM

FLASH". The "EEPROM FLASH" card is able to
conserve data without requiring an external power
supply.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1

-
machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001.

"BCU-001. 6
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
4
- "EEPROM FLASH" (1) memory card.
Consumables
None
3
Specific tools
None
2
PROCEDURE
Removal
2- Set the main switch (2) to "STOP".
"OFF".
4- Remove the EEPROM FLASH (1) memory card.
Refit
5- Line up the guides (5) and insert the new card (1) as far
as it will go.
1-007067-03-xx.svg
"I".
The "STOP"(6) lamp flashes slowly and the CPU carries
out a general deletion.
The full erase resets the CPU memories.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit - plc memory card DE-003 2/2
7- Set the main switch (2) to "RUN".

5
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006118-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDE-004 Removal / refit: striker fuses 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Replace the fuses when the striker pin has struck.
Before attempting any work make sure that the power

is off.
The primary electrical circuit uses orange wires.

1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 2

procedure "BCU-012.
"BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

4 3
Parts
- striker fuses. 1
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
Removal
1- Open the mains power supply switch.
3- Remove the screws (1) from the protectve cover (2) on
the main switch (3).
4- Remove the protective cover (2).
Make sure that there is no power at the input terminals
(5).
5- Open the safety cover (4).
6- Remove the fuse (6) fixing screws 6.
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit: striker fuses DE-004 2/2
The fixing screws are not present on all models. 5
7- Remove the faulty fuses (6).

Refit
8- Fit the new fuses (6), with the pin (7) facing upwards.
7
9- Close the safety cover (4).
10- Fit the protective cover (2) using the screws (1).
6
12- Close the mains machine power supply switch.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
13- Turn on the machine, see procedure "BCU-001.

"BCU-001.
1-006119-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDE-005 Removal / refit - UPS battery 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household

waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic
bag and send them to a waste treatment center.
The battery will reach full charge in 8 hours.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
Parts
-
UPS battery. 2
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
Removal
1- Remove the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006.
"BDE-006.
2- Set the UPS (1) down flat.
3- Remove the cover (2) from the battery compartment (3).
4- Remove the battery (3).
5- Disconnect the wires from the terminals (4).
Refit
3 4
6- Connect the wires to the terminals (4) on the new battery.
7- Insert the battery (3) into the compartment.
· Connect the black wire to the earthing terminal.
· Connect the red wire to the positive terminal.
8- Slide the battery compartment (3) cover (2) into the
grooves on the UPS (1) as far as it will go.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006121-01-xx.svg
9- Fit the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006.

"BDE-006.
3
L 1-006123-01-xx.svg
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit - UPS battery DE-005 2/2
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDE-006 Removal / refit - UPS 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The battery will reach full charge in 8 hours.
MACHINE STATUS
- the machine is stopped.
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009
"BCU-009.. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

3- Turn off the UPS (2) by pressing the button (3).
4- Remove the UPS (2) from the control station.
5- Disconnect the wires (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) from the UPS.
6- Take the UPS (2) out of the control station.
1-006278-04-xx.svg
Refit
2
7 Place the UPS (2) near the control station.
8- Connect the wires (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) to the UPS.
8
9- Place the UPS (2) inside the control station.
10- Press the button (3) to turn on the UPS (2).
The "Power on"(8) lamp comes on. 3
1-006124-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit - UPS DE-006 2/2
11- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004.

"BCU-004.
2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

12- Close the door (1) on the control station. 7
4
5 6
1-006126-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/2 BDE-007 Removal / refit - power controller box 2
MACHINE STATUS
-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- electrical wiring box.
Consumables
None
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Disconnect the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) from the box (5)
5
you wish to remove.
3 4
1-006127-01-xx.svg
3- Unscrew and remove the nuts (6).

6 6
1-006130-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit - power controller box DE-007 2/2
4- Unscrew and remove the bolt (7).

7
5- Remove the electrical box (5).
1-006131-01-xx.svg
6- Loosen and remove the bracket (8) and the rubber

5
stopper (9) assembly from the box (5).
7- Open the box (5).
8- Note down the profibus (10) address on the box (5).
Refit
9- Open the box again (5). 9 8
10- Set the address profibus (10) to the same as that on the
removed box by turning the inner arrow (11) using a small
screwdriver.
11- Set the circuit breaker (12). 1-006132-01-xx.svg
12- Fit the bracket (8) and the rubber stopper (9) on the box
(5).
13- Fit the box (5) on the oven frame.
14- Insert the fixing screws (7) and tighten up. 12
15- Insert the nuts (6) and tighten up.

16- Refit the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

11
10
1-006128-01-xx.svg
L
E
ID
S
©
SBO 20/24
1/4 BDE-009 Removal / refit - oven lamps 2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Always hold the lamps by their

their ends.
Always wear clean,

clean, dry gloves.
gloves.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
Check the power of the lamps you wish to replace (2500

W, 3000 W).
The shim stacks (7) allow you to adjust the position of 3

the lamps (1) on the rack (3). Always follow the position
of the shims (7) when replacing the lamps (1).
2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
"BCU-012,
1-006075-02-xx.svg
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- lamp (1).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
disengaged.
4
remain the same.

1-006337-01-xx.svg
L
E
D
I
S
©
SBO 20/24
emoval / refit - oven lamps DE-009 2/4

4- Disconnect the lamp (1) from the connector (4) using a
screwdriver.
3
1-006338-01-xx.svg
5- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn.

6
6- Remove the covers (6).
1-006339-02-xx.svg
7- Removing/re
Removing/refitting
fitting the shim(s) (7).
7
If a lamp is broken, clean the whole area thoroughly with
an aspirator. Dispose of any articles present and make
sure any electrical components are disposed of
according to specific procedures.
8- Remove the lamp (1). 1
1-008536-02-xx.svg
Refit
6

SBO20 Servicing and Procedure

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SBO20 Servicing and Procedure

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Documentation

Servicing Procedure Catalog

SBO 20/24 - N° 12410

Publication date : 13/11/2009 1/ 2

2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

USER PROCEDURE Part B

MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part C

ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009 1/ 2

2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

Using the procedures ................................................................................................................................. 1.3.5

Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1/ 2

A - 2/2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

Before using a procedure, first read the User Manual.

1.2 General Information

1.3 Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog

m Operation pictogram (1)

Production process procedure

Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Removal / Refit procedure

Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1 - 1/ 4

1.3.4 Contents of the procedure files

A - 1 - 2/4 Publication date : 13/11/2009

1.3.5 Using the procedures

Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.

Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.

Remark or observation on the results of an operation.

Publication date : 13/11/2009 A - 1 - 3/ 4

Symbol or convention Signifies

Step number in the procedure file

The location of the operation

Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part

Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part in an

Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part

Indicates the result of a step in the procedure

Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier

Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual's

Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter

1.4 Documents supplied with the machine

A - 1 - 4/4 Publication date : 13/11/2009

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

OPERATING PROCEDURE BCU

Entering the date .......................................................................

Publication date : 13/11/2009 B - 1/ 2

Preform feeder test ......................................................................................

B - 2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

Publication date : 13/11/2009 B - 1/ 2

B - 2/ 2 Publication date : 13/11/2009

1/2 BSU-001 Safety: opening/closing molds 1

The holding brace (1) prevents the locking system from

Never attempt any work on an open mold support unit 1

Hot metal, risk of burns.

There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Opening the mold support unit

8- Remove the locking system holding brace (1).

10- Close the safety doors.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1/2 BSU-002 Safety: blocking the manual rotation system 1